Operation Guide
E
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing the Korg TR music workstation.
To ensure trouble-free enjoyment, please read this manual carefully and use the instrument
as directed.
Conventions in this manual
About this manual
References to the TR
The TR is available in 88-key, 76-key and 61-key mod-
els, but all three models are referred to without distinc-
tion in this manual as “the TR.” Illustrations of the
front and rear panels in this manual show the 61-key
model, but the illustrations apply equally to the 76-key
and 88-key models.
The owner’s manuals and how to use
them
The TR come with the following owner’s manuals.
•
•
•
Operation Guide
Parameter Guide
Voice Name List (included in the CD-ROM)
Abbreviations for the manuals OG, PG, VNL
References to the manuals included with the TR are
abbreviated as follows in this document.
Operation Guide
OG: Operation Guide
PG: Parameter Guide
VNL: Voice Name List (included in the CD-ROM)
First read this manual carefully to gain a basic under-
standing of the instrument and to learn basic opera-
tion.
Switches and knobs [ ]
References to the switches, dials, and knobs on the
panel are enclosed in square brackets [ ].
“Introduction” explains the function of each part, how
to make connections, basic operation, and gives an
overview of each mode.
“Quick Start” explains basic topics (selecting sounds,
convenient functions for performance). If you wish to
begin playing immediately, read this section first.
“Basic Functions” contains mode-by-mode explana-
tions of what you need to know to edit sounds, record
on the sequencer, and record samples (If the separately
sold EXB-SMPL option is installed). This section also
explains how to use the arpeggiator, effects.
Parameters in the LCD display screen “ “
Parameters displayed in the LCD screen are enclosed
in double quotation marks “ “.
Boldface type
Parameter values are printed in boldface type.
Content that is of particular importance is also printed
in boldface type.
“Appendices” contains information on troubleshoot-
ing, specifications, and various other information.
Procedure steps 123...
Steps in a procedure are listed as 123...
Parameter Guide
☞p.■, ☞PG p.■
The Parameter Guide contains explanations and other
information regarding the operations of the parame-
ters and settings on the TR. The explanations are orga-
nized by mode, and page. Explanations and other
information on the effects and their parameters are also
provided for each effect.
These symbols indicate a reference page number in the
Operation Guide or in the Parameter Guide.
Symbols
,
,
These symbols respectively indicate cautions, advice,
and MIDI-related explanations.
Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter
appears in the display, or when you need to know
more about a particular function.
Example screen displays
The values of the parameters shown in the example
screens of this manual are only for explanatory pur-
poses, and may not necessary match the values that
appear in the LCD screen of your instrument.
Voice Name List
This lists the multisamples and drumsamples that are
built into the TR, and the factory preset combinations,
programs, drum kits, and user arpeggio patterns.
Refer to these lists when you wish to know more about
the preloaded sounds.
MIDI-related explanations
CC# is an abbreviation for Control Change Number.
In explanations of MIDI messages, numbers in square
brackets [ ] always indicate hexadecimal numbers.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Selecting and playing a
Using controllers to modify the
Using the arpeggiator while you
Using the arpeggiator as you play in
Inserting/ removing a card in the
Playing with the RPPR (Realtime Pattern
Selecting modes, pages and tabs; setting
Sampling a sound and playing it back as
Assigning a name to the sample or
Selecting and playing a demo song in the
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and recording RPPR (Realtime Pattern
Realtime-recording an RPPR
Writing global settings, user drum kits, and
Recording the sound of a combination or
Copy From Combi (Sequencer mode page
Caution and other functions in Sequencer
Recording a track,
Creating multisample indexes and
Settings for status, MIDI channel, and
Using Time Slice to divide a sample and play it
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the contrast (brightness) of the LCD
Arpeggiator settings in Combination and
Linking the arpeggiator to the
Operating requirements for connection to a
Synchronization between arpeggiators A
Synchronization between the arpeggiators
Synchronization with an external sequencer
modes ......................................................111
Effect settings in Sampling mode (requires
Effect settings for the AUDIO INPUT
Tuning to another instrument/
Specifying the function of the Assignable
Selecting different Velocity and Aftertouch
Setting the B-mode functions of REALTIME
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Overview
Effect section:
•
One insert effect (stereo-in/stereo-out), two master
Main features
effects (mono-in/stereo-out), and a three-band
master EQ (stereo-in/stereo-out) can all be used
simultaneously. You can select from 89 types of
effect algorithms, and edit them.
Overview
The TR Music Workstation features Korg’s acclaimed
HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system.
•
Highly flexible effect routing is possible. Effects can
also be routed freely to the individual outputs.
It contains high-quality preset multisamples/ pro-
grams/ combinations, an effect section, plus a
sequencer, dual polyphonic arpeggiator, RPPR, four-
channel audio output, and numerous other functional-
ity.
Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modula-
tion:
•
The synthesis section (filter etc.) provides Alternate
Modulation functionality, and the effect section
provides Effect Dynamic Modulation
functionality. This allows you to freely apply
modulation to parameters that affect the pitch,
filter, amp, EG, LFO, effects etc.
Controllers such as the joystick, [SW1] and [SW2] keys,
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs, or connected
pedals can be used to control filter or effects, allowing
you to modify the sound in realtime as you perform.
Arpeggiator gate or velocity, or the tempo of the arpeg-
giator or sequencer can also be controlled.
•
LFO and delay time parameters can be
synchronized to MIDI clock/ tempo. You can
synchronize sounds or effects to the tempo of the
sequencer or the arpeggiator.
In addition, the optional EXB-SMPL sampling
upgrade can be installed to add two-channel audio
p.260)
Programs and combinations
The TR is the ideal music workstation for music pro-
duction or live performance.
•
In the Program mode, the TR provides 512 user
programs, plus 128 programs + 9 drum sets for GM
compatibility.
HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system
When shipped from the factory, it is loaded with
high-quality programs that cover a wide range of
musical needs.
The 512 user programs can be modified by adjusting
the numerous editing parameters, the effects and
the arpeggiator, to create your own original pro-
grams.
The HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system is a PCM
tone generator system with full digital signal process-
ing that guarantees pristine sound, and features enor-
mous flexibility in musical extensibility, modulation,
and effect routing.
Tone generator section:
•
64 MB of preset PCM ROM containing 470
multisamples and 518 drumsamples.
•
The TR provides 24 user drum kits and nine GM2-
compatible ROM drum kits. With the factory
settings, preset drum kits that cover a variety of
musical genres are provided. You can create your
own original drum kits by assigning a drumsample
or an original sampled sound to each note of the
keyboard. For each note, you can make filter and
amp settings, and even route the sound through
effects and to a individual audio output.
•
The sampling frequency is 48 kHz, and the
maximum polyphony is 62 voices.
Filter/ synthesis section:
•
24 dB/oct Low Pass Resonance type or 12 dB/oct
Low Pass & High Pass type filters can be used. A
wide variety of filter effects can be achieved, from
active sounds with aggressive resonance to subtle
tones using a high pass filter.
•
The TR provides 384 user combinations. The
factory settings contain a wide variety of Preload
combinations.
A combination allows you to use layers, splits, or
velocity switches etc. to combine up to eight pro-
grams together with effects and two arpeggiators, in
order to create complex sounds that could not be
produced by a program. You can also make settings
that include external tone generators.
•
A broad range of editing parameters gives you
control over every aspect of the sound.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequencer
EXB-SMPL sampling upgrade
TR provides a high-performance 16-track MIDI
sequencer, with more than sufficient power for use as a
stand-alone sequencer. The sequencer can serve as the
core that brings together TR’s numerous capabilities,
allowing it to serve as an integrated music worksta-
tion.
The following functionality can be added by installing
the separately sold EXB-SMPL option.
•
Sampling mode is added. Input sources from the
two-channel audio inputs can be sampled and
edited to create original multisamples or samples,
which can then be used in a program or drum kit.
For details on the features of Sampling mode, refer
RPPR
•
Two-channel audio input is added. This two-
channel audio input allows 48 kHz 16 bit linear
mono/ stereo sampling. A MIC or LINE level select
switch and level adjustment control supports a
wide range of external audio sources, from mic
level to line level.
TR features a RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record-
ing) function.
In Sequencer mode, this function allows you to assign
preset patterns or user patterns (with a specified play-
back track) to individual keys on the keyboard, and
playback or record that pattern in realtime simply by
pressing the assigned key. Numerous preset patterns,
including patterns ideal for drum tracks, are built into
the internal memory.
The audio input can also be routed to the effects.
You can apply an effect while sampling, or use the
TR as a 2-in/ 4-out effect processor.
•
A SCSI connector is added, allowing external SCSI
devices such as hard disks to be connected. A
connected external SCSI device can be used in the
same way as an SD card to save or load data.
Dual polyphonic arpeggiator
•
Five preset arpeggio patterns (UP, DOWN, ALT1
ALT2, RANDOM) and 216 user arpeggio patterns
are provided. With the factory settings, these
contain a wide variety of preset user patterns.
In addition to providing conventional arpeggiator
functionality, the polyphonic arpeggiator of the TR
can respond to the pitches or timing at which you
play the keyboard, and produce a diverse range of
chords or phrases. This can be used to play a variety
of drum phrases (using the “Fixed Note Mode” that
is ideal for drums), bass phrases, or guitar and key-
board backing riffs. The arpeggiator is also effective
for use with subtly moving pads, synth sounds, or
sound effects.
In Combination mode, and Sequencer mode, the TR
provides dual arpeggiators that can simultaneously
play two arpeggio patterns. You can apply separate
arpeggio patterns to drum and bass programs, or
use keyboard splits or velocity to switch between
arpeggio patterns for an even more dynamic perfor-
mance.
4 channel audio output
•
In addition to the L/ MONO and R main stereo
audio outputs, TR provides two individual audio
outputs, for a total of four channels of audio
output. The sound from each oscillator, drum,
timbre/ track, or insertion effect can be routed
freely to any output.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination mode
Overview of the modes
•
Select and play combinations
A combination is a set of two or more programs (a
maximum of eight), and allows you to produce
complex sounds that could not be created by an
individual program.
You can choose combinations from rewritable banks
A, B, and C which contain a total of 384 combina-
tions.
The TR has a large number of functions that let you
play and edit programs and combinations, record and
play sequence data, and manage data on media. The
largest unit used to organize these functions is called a
mode. The TR has five modes.
If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed,
Sampling mode will be added (for a total of six
modes), and you will be able to record and edit sam-
ples.
•
Edit a combination
Make settings for volume, pan, layer/ split etc. for
each timbre (program), and make settings for effects
and the two arpeggiators etc.
Program mode
Sequencer mode
•
Select and play programs
You can choose programs from rewritable banks A,
B, C, and D which contain a total of 512 programs,
and non-rewritable bank G (128 programs compati-
ble with the GM standard, and nine drum pro-
grams).
•
Use the 16-track sequencer to record and playback
songs.
•
•
Make effect settings for the song.
You can record a performance using the
arpeggiator(s) into a song or pattern.
•
Edit a program
•
•
•
You can use a cue list to set up consecutive
playback of multiple songs, and specify the number
of repeats for each song.
Make settings for the oscillator, filter, amp, EG, LFO,
effects, and arpeggiator.
Select a multisample (the following multisamples
are available)
You can use a maximum of 20 cue lists, 200 songs,
and 150 preset patterns. One song can use as many
as 100 patterns.
•
•
470 internal multisamples (ROM, EX)
Multisamples (RAM) created in Sampling mode
(if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
The TR can be used as a 16-track multitimbral tone
generator.
•
Create drum programs using a drum kit (created
in Global mode)
SAMPLING MODE (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed)
PROGRAM MODE
OSC 1
Multi Sample
Sample
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
Insert / Master Effect
Multi Sample - H
Drum Kit
1
2
IFX
MFX 1
MFX 2
Multi Sample - L
Sample
Insert Effect
IFX
PITCH1 FILTER1 AMP1
MEQ
Sample
OSC 2
Multi Sample - H
Multi Sample - L
Arpeggiator
Sample
PITCH2 FILTER2 AMP2
GLOBAL MODE
COMBINATION MODE
DRUM KIT
Insert /Master Effect
TIMBRE 1
TIMBRE 2
TIMBRE 3
TIMBRE 4
TIMBRE 5
TIMBRE 6
TIMBRE 7
TIMBRE 8
PROGRAM
Key
Assign
IFX
MFX 1
MFX 2
Drum Sample / Sample - H
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
Drum Sample / Sample - L
MEQ
ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN
User Pattern: P0 - 4
Arpeggiator - A
Arpeggiatpr - B
User Pattern: U00 - 215
SEQUENCER
Insert /Master Effect
TRACK 9
TRACK 10
TRACK 11
TRACK 12
TRACK 13
TRACK 14
TRACK 15
TRACK 16
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
PROGRAM
IFX
MFX 1
MFX 2
PROGRAM
MEDIA MODE
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
MEQ
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
Arpeggiator - A
Arpeggiatpr - B
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Create and playback patterns in realtime, using the
RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/ Recording) function.
Sampling mode
(If the EXB-SMPL option is installed)
•
An external audio device or mic connected to the
rear panel AUDIO INPUT jacks can be sampled
(recorded as a sample). An insert effect can also be
applied to the select input sound while it is being
sampled.
Global mode
•
Make settings that affect the entire TR, such as
master tune and global MIDI channel.
•
Create drum kits (24 kits), user arpeggio patterns
(216 patterns), and user scales (16 one-octave scales
and 1 all-note scale).
•
Waveform data that was sampled or loaded in
Media mode can be modified using a variety of
editing functions, such as adjusting the loop point,
using Time Slice, or Time Stretch.
•
•
Create drum kits using the 518 internal drum
samples (ROM, EX). You can also use samples
(RAM) that were created in Sampling mode
(requires the separately sold EXB-SMPL option).
•
•
You can edit multisamples (which consist of
multiple samples).
Set the function of the assignable pedals and
assignable switches.
You can convert a multisample into a program.
When this conversion is performed, a multisample
created in Sampling mode can be used in Program,
Combination, and Sequencer modes.
•
•
Transmit data dumps of MIDI exclusive data.
Adjust the input level from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2
(if the EXB-SMPL option is installed). This setting is
valid outside of Sampling mode. The internal
effects can be applied to the external input sound.
The settings for Sampling mode are made
independently in Sampling mode itself.
Media mode
•
•
•
Data of each mode can be saved and loaded using
the SD card slot or an external SCSI device (if the
separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed).
Media such as an SD card or hard drive (EXB-SMPL
option required) can be formatted, and then data
can be managed by copying etc.
Korg format, AKAI, AIFF, and WAVE format
sample data can be loaded. Sample data can also be
saved in Korg format, or exported in AIFF or
WAVE format (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed).
•
•
Songs that you created in Sequencer mode can be
saved in SMF format. SMF files can be loaded as
Sequencer mode songs.
You can use the Data Filer function (to save/ load
MIDI exclusive data).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front and rear panel
Front panel
9
10
5
4
6
8
12
1
2
3
7
11
13
1. [SW1] key, [SW2] key
5. REALTIME CONTROLS
These keys are on/ off switches for the functions to
which they were assigned in Program, Combination,
Sequencer and Sampling modes (if the EXB-SMPL
option is installed). When on, the key will light
2. Joystick
This controls pitch or modulation, etc.
Move the joystick up/ down or left/ right (+Y, –Y,
Various program parameters and effect parameters
will determine what is controlled by the joystick.
Use the [SELECT] key to select realtime controller
mode A/ B/ C, and use knobs [1]–[4] to control the
tone, effects, MIDI control changes, and arpeggiator
3. Headphone jack
A set of headphones with a (1/ 4") stereo phone plug
can be connected here.
The output from the L/ MONO and R OUTPUT jacks
can be monitored in stereo through the headphones.
[SELECT] key
This key switches the realtime controller between A-
mode, B-mode, and C-mode. The LED of the selected
mode will light.
4. [VOLUME] slider
This adjusts the volume that is output from the OUT-
PUT jacks (L/ MONO, R) and the headphone jack.
[ARP ON/ OFF] key
This key turns the arpeggiator on/ off. When on, the
key will light.
[1], [2], [3], [4] knob
A-mode
[1] LPF CUTOFF:
Controls the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter.
[2] RESONANCE/ HPF:
Controls the filter resonance level or the high pass filter
cutoff frequency.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[3] EG-INTENSITY:
Controls the filter EG intensity.
[GLOBAL] key
Global mode will be selected
[4] EG-RELEASE:
Controls the filter/ amp release time.
[MEDIA] key
Media mode will be selected.
B-mode
[COMPARE] key
[1] ASSIGNABLE 1:
Use this key when you wish to compare the sound of
the program or combination that you are currently
editing with the un-edited sound that was written into
memory. You can also use this key to make “before and
after” comparisons when recording or editing in
[2] ASSIGNABLE 2:
[3] ASSIGNABLE 3:
[4] ASSIGNABLE 4:
Controls the functions that are assigned in each mode
(Program, Combination, Sequencer, or Sampling (if the
EXB-SMPL option is installed)).
[SAMPLING] (EXB-SMPL) key
C-mode
This key selects the Sampling mode.
This is valid only if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed.
[1] ———: not used
[2] ARP-GATE:
Controls the gate time (note duration) of the arpeggi-
ated notes. At the center position (12 o’clock), the set-
ting of the arpeggiator “Gate” parameter will be used.
Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the time,
and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the time.
If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is not
installed, pressing the [SAMPLING] key will cause
a message of “No Sampling Upgrade Installed” to
be displayed.
7. [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key,
[3] ARP-VELOCITY:
Controls the velocity (playing strength) of the arpeggi-
ated notes. At the center position (12 o’clock), the set-
ting of the arpeggiator “Velocity” parameter will be
used. Rotating the knob toward the left will weaken
the velocity, and rotating it toward the right will
strengthen the velocity.
[F1 T1/ T9] … [F8 T8/ T16] keys
Function [F1]–[F8] keys
These keys select the tabs that are displayed in each
page. They are also used to execute utilities and other
functions.
[4] TEMPO:
Controls the tempo of the arpeggiator or of the
Sequencer mode .
The LED beside “TEMPO” will blink at quarter note
intervals of the specified tempo.
Timbre/ track select [T1/ T9]–[T8/ T16] keys
By holding down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key and
pressing a [T1/ T9]–[T8/ T16] key, you can select the
timbre/ track parameters corresponding to the key
number.
6. Mode keys, [COMPARE] key
When a single page displays the parameters for tim-
bres 1–8 of a Combination or for tracks 1–8/ 9–16 of
Sequencer mode, these keys select one of these tim-
bres/ tracks.
8. LCD screen
Here you can select pages, and parameters, and set val-
These keys are used to enter each mode.
Pressing a key will enter the corresponding mode (the
9. VALUE controllers
The following VALUE controllers are used to set the
[COMBI] key
Combination mode will be selected.
[PROG] key
Program mode will be selected.
[SEQ] key
Sequencer mode will be selected.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[VALUE] dial
[EXIT] key
Use this dial to modify the value of the parameter.
In Program, Combination, Sequencer, Sampling (if the
separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed), and
Global modes, pressing this key from anywhere other
than page 1.1 will take you to page 1.1 of that mode.
When a dialog box is open, this key will cancel the set-
tings made in the dialog box and close the dialog box
(corresponds to the “Cancel”). If a Utility menu or
page menu is open, pressing [EXIT] will close the
menu.
[INC]/ [DEC] keys
These are used to increase or decrease the parameter
value in steps of one. It is convenient to use these to
make fine adjustments.
Numeric keys [0] – [9], [ENTER] key, [–] key,
[./ HOLD] key
Use these keys to numerically input a parameter value.
Use numeric keys [0]–[9], the [–] key, and the [./
HOLD] key to enter the value, and press the [ENTER]
key to confirm it. The [./ HOLD] key lets you input a
value with a decimal point. The [–] key inverts the sign
(+/ –) of the parameter value.
[MENU PAGE +/ –] key
Use this key to select different pages on screen. When
you press this key, a list of the pages within the mode
will appear in the LCD screen. Use the function key
[F1]–[F7] or cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the
desired page, and press the [F8] key to move to the
selected page.
You can also move to a desired page by holding down
the [MENU] key and using numeric keys [1]–[7] to
enter a two-digit page number.
In addition, [./ HOLD] can be used if you wish to select
sounds by category in program or combination mode.
By holding down the [ENTER] key and pressing a
numeric key [0]–[9], you can select up to ten utility
menu commands for the current page.
In addition, you can hold down the [MENU] key and
use cursor keys [ ], [ ] to switch pages in the order of
10. [CATEGORY] key, [AUDITION] key
CURSOR keys [ ], [ –], [ ], [ +]
Use these keys to select different parameters on screen.
In addition, you can hold down the [MENU] key and
use cursor keys [ ], [ ] to switch pages in the order of
[CATEGORY] key
In each mode, you can directly access the utility menu
“Select by Category” by choosing a parameter that can
be selected by category and then pressing the [Cate-
gory] key.
This allows you to view and select programs or combi-
12.BANK keys
These keys are used to switch Program/ Combination
banks.
[AUDITION] key
This key activates the Audition function, which plays
a riff (phrase) suitable for each preloaded or preset pro-
gram.
PROG BANK: [A], [B], [C], [D], [GM]
When selecting programs, use keys [A], [B], [C], [D],
and [GM]. The key of the selected bank will light.
Each time you press [GM], you will cycle through the
GM banks and the drum bank as follows: G, g(d), G ...
etc.
In Program mode, pressing the [AUDITION] key (the
key will light) will cause the audition riff to play
repeatedly.
In Sampling mode (if the EXB-SMPL option is
installed), the selected sample will be played.
COMBI BANK: [A], [B], [C]
11.[EXIT] key, [MENU PAGE +/ –] key, CURSOR
keys [ ], [ –], [ ], [ +]
When selecting combinations, use keys [A], [B], and
[C]. The LED of the selected bank will light.
In Combination, and Sequencer modes when the edit
cell (highlighted area) is located at the program of a
timbre or track, you can use the BANK keys to select
the bank of the program. The bank key of the program
selected for that timbre/ track will light.
In dialog boxes such as Write Program or Write Com-
bination, these keys are used to specify the program or
combination bank that will be the writing destination,
etc.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[LOCATE] key
13.SEQUENCER/ SAMPLING
(If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
This key resets the playback location of a song or cue
list to a specified location. You can also press this key
when “stuck notes” occur for some reason.
[REC/ WRITE] key
When you press this key in Sequencer mode, the TR
will enter recording-ready mode (the key will light). If
you then press the [START/ STOP] key, recording will
When you press this key in Program, Combination, or
Global modes, a dialog box will appear. If you then
press the [F8] (“OK”) key, the edited content will be
[PAUSE] key
This key pauses playback of a song or cue list (the key
will light). Press the key again to cancel Pause (the key
will go dark).
When you press this key in Sampling mode (if the
EXB-SMPL option is installed) and then press the
[START/ STOP] key, sample recording will begin.
[
REW] key
This key rewinds playback of a song or cue list.
Rewind will occur when you press the key (the key
will light). (This will not operate during recording.)
[START/ STOP] key
[FF
] key
In Sequencer mode, this key starts/ stops song record-
ing/ playback, or cue list playback. (The key will blink
in time with the beat during recording or playback.)
This key fast-forwards playback of a song or cue list.
Fast-forward will occur when you press the key (the
key will light). (This will not operate during record-
ing.)
In Sampling mode (if the EXB-SMPL option is
installed), press the [REC/ WRITE] key and then press
the [START/ STOP] key to start/ stop sample recording.
In the SMPL 2.1–2: Sample Edit, Edit2 page, pressing
this key will sound the sample.
Rear panel
8
7
6
3 2
5
4
1
1. SD card slot
3. [POWER] switch
You can insert an SD card in this slot.
Refer to p.14 for details on inserting, removing, and
handling media.
4. AC power supply connector (~AC9V)
Connect this to the included AC/ AC power supply.
After connecting the power supply cable to TR, con-
2. USB B connector (for connecting to a
computer)
You can connect your computer to this connector.
Using a single USB cable, your TR can send and receive
MIDI information to and from a computer . This elimi-
nates the need for a MIDI interface and the associated
cables. (☞PG p.233)
5. AUDIO OUTPUT
Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp
or mixer. In addition to the L/ MONO and R main ste-
reo audio outputs, TR provides two individual audio
outputs. The sound from each oscillator, drum, tim-
bre/ track, or insertion effect can be freely routed to
What is USB?
USB stands for Universal Serial Bus, and is an interface
for transferring data between a computer, a keyboard
and/ or peripheral devices.
The USB connector of the TR is only able to trans-
mit and receive MIDI data.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via
USB to your computer, transmission from the
MIDI OUT connector is halted.
(MAIN) L/ MONO, R
These are the main audio output jacks. By setting “Bus
Select” to L/R, the output from an oscillator, an inser-
tion effect, an individual drum part, or the metronome
can be output to the (MAIN) L/ MONO and R jacks.
When making connections in stereo, use L/ MONO
and R. When making connections in mono, use the L/
MONO jack.
MIDI THRU connector
Musical data and sound settings etc. that are received
at the MIDI IN connector are re-transmitted without
change from the MIDI THRU connector.
You can use this to connect multiple MIDI devices via
MIDI cables (☞PG p.233).
(INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2
8. EXB-SMPL
These are individual (independent) audio output jacks.
By cycling the “Bus Select” through 1, 2, 1/2 an oscilla-
tor, an insertion effect, an individual drum part, or the
metronome etc. can be assigned to be output from the
(INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2 jacks. The output from the 1, 2
jacks is not affected by the [VOLUME] slider.
(If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
These connectors are used to sample mono or stereo
The MIC/ LINE level select switch ([MIC/ LINE]
switch) and the level adjustment knob ([LEVEL] knob)
allow a wide range of audio sources to be input, from
mic level to line level.
6. Pedal connections
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack
The separately sold Korg XVP-10 EXP/ VOL pedal or
EXP-2 foot controller (options) can be connected to this
Its function can be assigned in Global mode, allowing
you to use the pedal to control the volume, etc.
SCSI connector
Use a SCSI cable to connect this to a SCSI-compatible
device (hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, etc.). (☞ EXB-
SMPL owner’s manual)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks
Connect them to the OUTPUT jack(s) of your external
audio device or mic.
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack
A separately sold on/ off foot switch such as the Korg
Its function can be assigned in Global mode, allowing
you to use the foot switch as a modulation controller,
to select programs or combinations, or to start/ stop the
[LEVEL] knob
This knob adjusts the input level of the AUDIO INPUT
[MIC/ LINE] switch
This switch selects the input level of the AUDIO
DAMPER jack
A separately sold switch-type pedal such as the Korg
DS-1H damper pedal can be connected here.
If a DS-1H is connected, it will function as a half-
damper pedal. In order to ensure that the half-damper
pedal functions correctly, please adjust the polarity and
the sensitivity (☞PG p.126, 128).
If any other switch-type pedal is connected, it will
function as a damper switch.
Set the polarity according to the pedal that you con-
nected. (☞PG p.128)
7. MIDI
MIDI IN connector
Musical data and sound settings etc. are received at
this connector.
Use this to play TR from another connected MIDI
device (☞PG p.233).
MIDI OUT connector
Musical data and sound settings etc. are transmitted
from this connector.
Use this to control another connected MIDI device
from TR (☞PG p.233).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: Function buttons
Objects and functions in the LCD
screen
By pressing the function key [F1]–[F8] nearest this
button, you can turn various functions on/ off.
,
:
a: Current page
d: Edit cell
e: Check box
In Media mode, these select the current directory.
:
Accesses the utility menu where you can execute
utility menu commands.
Other function buttons examples
Sequencer mode: EDIT/ DONE, INSERT, CUT,
COPY, JUMP, DONE, Tie, Rest,
Back, Done (used in Cue List,
Event Edit, Step Recording)
REVERT (copy and paste RPPR
settings)
c: Parameter
b: Tab
f: Function buttons
a: Current page
This indicates the currently selected page within
the mode. From the left, this area shows the mode
name, page number:name, tab name, and the
parameter name of the edit cell.
Global mode:
TEXT, KEY+, –
Sampling mode (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed):
Mode name
Page number:name
Parameter name
Tab name
INSERT, CUT, COPY, CREATE
(create multisample), L/ R,
ZOOM
* Utility menu
b: Tab
Most pages are divided into two or more tabs. By
pressing the closest function key [F1]–[F7], you can
select a tab to access the corresponding page.
c: Parameters
In each page, you can press the “UTILITY” func-
tion button (the [F8] key) to access the utility
menu. The utility menu contains commands that
can be used in that page. The utility menu that
appears will differ depending on the page that is
selected.
The parameters for various settings are displayed
in the LCD screen. Use cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
] to select the desired parameter.
d: Edit cell
When you use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
the selected parameter will be highlighted in the
LCD screen. This area is called the edit cell, and
your editing will affect the highlighted area.
The parameter value of the edit cell can be modi-
fied using VALUE controllers such as the [VALUE]
ters that accept a key number or a velocity value,
you can also hold down the [ENTER] key and play
a note on the keyboard to enter the key number or
velocity value.
You can also select up to ten utility menu com-
mands by holding down the [ENTER] key and
pressing a numeric key [0]–[9].
Press the [EXIT] key to close the utility menu.
For
, press the [F7] key to select the desired
utility menu command. You can also use the cur-
sor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to make your selection.
For
, press the [F8] key to open the dialog
box of the selected utility menu command.
This key also switches the status of commands that
you check or uncheck.
e: Check box
Use cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select a check
box (edit cell), and use a VALUE controller such as
the [VALUE] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys to add
or remove the check mark.
When checked, the parameter will function, when
unchecked, the parameter will not function.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
* Dialog boxes
* Page menu
When you select a utility menu command etc., a
dialog box will open.
In Combination, Program, Sequencer, Global, or
Sampling (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option
is installed) modes, pressing the [MENU] key will
display a list of the pages in that mode. (The page
in which you where when you pressed the
[MENU] key will be highlighted.)
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
input the parameter values. When selecting pro-
gram or combination numbers in a dialog box, you
can use the BANK [A]–[GM] keys in addition to
the VALUE controllers.
To select a page, press the nearest function key
[F1]–[F7]. By pressing the same key you can move
consecutively downward. You can also use cursor
keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to move left/ up/ down/
right.
As in the utility menu, press the function key [F1]–
[F8] nearest
etc. (function button 2) to access
the execution or operation screen. In some cases, a
dialog box will appear. Follow the directions
shown in the dialog box.
You can also move to the desired page by holding
down the [MENU] key and using numeric keys
[0]–[7] to enter a two-digit page number. In addi-
tion, you can hold down the [MENU] key and use
the cursor keys [ ], [ ] to move in steps of one
page; in the example shown below, this would be
Play → P/ M → Ctrl → Prm1 → ... etc.
To execute, select
cancel without executing, select
(press the [F8] key). To
(press the
[F7] key). The dialog box will close. The [EXIT] key
is equivalent to “Cancel,” “Done,” or “Exit.”
* Function buttons 2
Press the function key [F1]–[F8] nearest this button
to execute the function.
* Other objects
:
To use slider- or knob-shaped objects, use the cur-
sor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the desired
item, and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the
value.
Utility menu, etc.
* Text dialog box
When you use the function keys to select
text dialog box will appear.
, a
Other types of objects are shown in the effect rout-
In this dialog box you can rename text (e.g., the
Sliders
Knobs
* Scroll bar
This indicates that the list contains selections or
parameters that cannot all be shown in the screen
at once. Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to
move within the list.
Routing
Scroll
bar
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO
and R jacks to the INPUT jacks of your powered
monitor system, mixer etc.
Connecting audio equipment etc.
Connections must be made with the power turned
off. Please be aware that careless operation may
damage your speaker system or cause malfunc-
tions.
L/ MONO and R are the main outputs. If you are
outputting in stereo, make connections to the
(MAIN) L/ MONO jack and the R jack. If you are
outputting in monaural, make connections to the
(MAIN) L/ MONO jack. We recommend that you
playback in stereo if possible.
If you wish to output from the AUDIO OUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2, jacks, connect these jacks to
your mixer, and then connect the mixer output to
the INPUT of your powered monitor system etc.
1. Connecting the AC/ AC power
supply
Connect the included AC/AC power supply to the
AC power supply inlet of TR, and then connect the
other end of the cable to an AC outlet.
Headphones
When using headphones, plug them into the head-
phones jack located on the front panel.
2. Connecting audio output devices
AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/ MONO, R,
(INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2
Here, you can connect a set of amplified monitor
speakers or your audio system to output TR’s sound.
If you wish to use the AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVID-
UAL) 1–2 jacks of TR, we recommend that you use a
mixer.
If you playback TR through your stereo audio sys-
tem, be aware that high volumes may damage
your speakers. Be careful not to raise the volume
excessively.
Power Switch
Headphones
PHONES
USB cable
computer
Connection to a computer
Connecting separately sold
Connecting MIDI equipment
to an AC outlet
AC/AC power supply
Connecting the power cable
Headphones
PHONES
INPUT
Connecting audio output devices
OUTPUT
INPUT
Connecting pedals etc
Powered monitors, etc.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Connecting pedals etc.
Connections to MIDI equipment/
computers
Foot pedal connections
A foot pedal can be connected to control the volume or
other functions.
Connect a separately sold Korg assignable pedal such
as the XVP-10 EXP/ VOL or EXP-2 to the rear panel
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack.
The function controlled by the foot pedal is specified in
GLOBAL 1.1–3: System, Foot page “Foot Pedal
1. Connections to MIDI equipment
The keyboard, controllers, and sequencer etc. of TR can
be used to control an external MIDI tone generator.
Conversely, another MIDI keyboard or sequencer can
control the tone generator of TR to produce sound.
Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI connectors
of TR with the MIDI connectors of your external
device.
Foot switch connections
A foot switch controls sostenuto, soft pedal on/ off,
arpeggiator on/ off, to select programs or combina-
tions, and to start/ stop the sequencer etc.
Connect a separately sold Korg foot switch such as the
PS-1 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack.
The function that will be controlled by the foot switch
and the polarity of the foot switch can be set in GLO-
BAL 1.1–3: System, Foot page “Foot SW Assign,” and
☞ PG p.233 “MIDI applications – Connecting MIDI
devices/ computers”
If MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via
USB to your computer, transmission from the
MIDI OUT connector is halted.
Damper pedal connections
2. Connections to a computer
Allows you to sustain the sound while playing.
Connect a Korg DS-1H damper pedal (separately sold
option) to the rear panel DAMPER jack. If a DS-1H is
connected, you can produce half-damper effects.
The polarity of the damper pedal can be set in GLO-
BAL 1.1–3: System, Foot page “Damper Polarity,” and
its sensitivity can be adjusted by the GLOBAL 1.1–1
System utility menu command “Half Damper Calibra-
tion.” (☞PG p.126, 128)
Your performance on the TR, as well as controller and
sequencer data, can be sent to a computer, and the tone
generator of the TR can be played from the computer
either via USB or via a MIDI interface.
You can use a MIDI interface to connect the MIDI
connectors of TR to the MIDI connectors of your
computer.
You can connect the TR’s USB B connector to the
USB connector of your computer.
☞ PG p.233 “MIDI applications – Connecting MIDI
devices/ computers”
Some USB-MIDI interfaces may not be able to
transmit or receive the TR’s MIDI exclusive mes-
sages.
The USB connector of the TR is only able to trans-
mit and receive MIDI data.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting/ removing a card in the
SD card slot
Connecting separately sold
options
If an SD card is inserted in the SD card slot, you can
use it to save or load various types of TR data.
By installing the separately sold EXB-SMPL option you
can add two channels of audio input jacks and a SCSI
connector.
Inserting a card
For details on installing the EXB-SMPL, refer to PG
p.260.
1Insert an SD card in the SD card slot.
With the card label facing upward, insert the con-
nector end of the card into the SD card slot and
press it in until you hear a click.
Guitar
SD card slot
Effect processor etc.
If a passive type guitar (a guitar
without an internal preamp) is
connected, it will not be possible to
sample at an appropriate level due to
the impedance mismatch. Such
instruments must be connected via a
SD card
CD player, analog record player, etc.
preamp or effect unit.
Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when
you insert it. Forcing it in the wrong direction may
damage the slot or the card, and the data may be
lost.
1. Audio input connections
Removing a card
Connect a mic or the OUTPUT jacks of an external
audio device to the AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks when you
want to sample in Sampling mode (if the separately
sold EXB-SMPL option is installed), or in Program,
Combination, or Sequencer mode when you want to
apply an internal effect to an external input sound and
output the processed sound from the OUTPUT jacks.
Never remove an SD card from the slot while load-
ing, saving, or formatting is in progress.
1Remove the card from the SD card slot.
Press the card inward; you will hear a click, and the
card will pop out part-way, allowing you to pull it
completely out.
Refer to the owner’s manual included with your
card, and observe the guidelines for handling and
use.
For details on connections when sampling in Sam-
For details on connections when applying an
effect in other modes and outputting to the OUT-
2. SCSI connections
You can connect SCSI-compatible devices (hard disks,
CD-ROM drives etc.). (☞EXB-SMPL Operation Man-
ual)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
2Press the [MENU] key.
The page menu will appear.
Selecting modes, pages and tabs;
setting parameters
1. Selecting modes
In Media mode there is only one page, so the page
menu will not appear.
In order to use a particular function on the TR, you
must first select the appropriate mode. Press one of
the front panel mode keys to enter the correspond-
ing mode.
3Press the function key [F1]–[F7] that is nearest the
page you wish to select.
If multiple pages are assigned to one function key,
press the same key to move the cursor downward.
You can also use the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] cursor keys
to move.
[COMBI] key:
[PROG] key:
[SEQ] key:
[GLOBAL] key:
[MEDIA] key:
Combination mode
Program mode
Sequencer mode
Global mode
4Press the [F8] (“Open”) key.
Media mode
When you press the [F8] key, you will jump to the
selected page, and that page will appear.
As an example here, press the [F3] key three times to
select “KeyZ,” and then press the [F8] (“Open”) key.
The 3.3: Ed-Key Zone page will appear.
[SAMPLING] key: Sampling mode (if the sepa-
rately sold EXB-SMPL option
is installed)
You can also use the following alternative methods
to select a page.
•
•
Press the [MENU] key, and then use the [ ], [
keys to move forward or backward through the
pages in the order of 1.1→2.1→2.2→3.1 etc.
]
2. Selecting pages and tabs
Each mode has a large number of parameters, which
are grouped into pages. Each page is further divided
into as many as seven groups. These are referred to as
“tabs.”
Hold down the [MENU] key, and use numeric keys
[1]–[7] to enter a two-digit page number to move
directly to the corresponding page. (To select the
page shown above, you would press [3], [3].)
If only one page is assigned to each function key
(group), as in COMBI 1.1: Play or the pages of
Global mode, the first digit of the numeric key [1]–
[7] will move to the corresponding page.
Selecting a page
1Make sure that the desired mode is selected.
To select a mode, press the appropriate mode key.
Here we will use Combination mode as an example
for our explanation. Press the [COMBI] key.
The page selected at this time will be the page that was
last selected. If there is no corresponding page, nothing
will happen.
When you press the [EXIT] key, you will return to
1.1 from any page.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Numeric keys [0]–[9], [ENTER] key, [–] key,
[./ HOLD] key
Use these when you know the parameter value that
you wish to input.
After using the numeric keys [0]–[9] to input a number,
press the [ENTER] key to finalize the parameter value.
Use the [–] key to enter negative numbers.
Use the [./ HOLD] key to enter a decimal point. In the
1.1: Play page of Program and Combination modes, the
[./ HOLD] key will perform the Category Hold or 10’s
Hold function. (☞PG p.2)
Selecting a tab
5Press the function key [F1]–[F7] that is nearest the
tab displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
As an example, we will select the “Slope” tab. Press
the [F3] key.
Some pages have no tabs.
BANK [A]–[GM] keys
6To move to another page, press the [MENU] key
and repeat the procedure from step 3.
The BANK [A]–[GM] keys are used in Program mode
to select the program bank and in Combination mode
to select the combination bank. In Combination mode,
they are also used to select the program bank for each
timbre of the combination. In Sequencer mode, these
keys are used to select the bank of the program used by
each track of the song.
3. Selecting parameters
Use the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] cursor keys to select the
parameter that you wish to edit.
In Combination mode pages that display timbres 1–8,
or in Sequencer mode pages that display tracks 1–8 or
9–16, you can hold down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key
and press the nearest function key [F1]–[F8] to select
the desired timbre or track.
These keys are also used to specify the bank in dialog
boxes such as Write Program or Write Combination.
[COMPARE] key
4. Setting a parameter
Use this key when you wish to compare an edited pro-
gram or combination sound with the un-edited origi-
nal (i.e., the sound that is written into memory).
When editing a program or combination, press this
key. The key will light, and the last-written settings for
that program number or combination number will be
recalled. When you press the [COMPARE] key once
again, the key will go dark and you will return to the
settings that you were editing.
The parameter value in the edit cell can be set by using
the front panel VALUE controllers ([INC]/ [DEC] keys,
[VALUE] dial, numeric keys [0]–[9], [–] key, [./ HOLD]
key, and [ENTER] key). As necessary, you can also use
the BANK [A]–[GM] keys, and the [COMPARE] key.
In the case of parameters that require you to enter a
note or velocity value, you can enter the value by play-
ing a key on the keyboard while holding down the
[ENTER] key.
If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the
[COMPARE] key (i.e., the settings that are written into
memory), the key will go dark, and it will not be possi-
ble to return to the previous settings by pressing the
[COMPARE] key again.
VALUE controllers
In Sequencer mode, you can use the [COMPARE] key
to make “before and after” comparisons immediately
after using realtime recording or step recording to
record a song, or after performing a track edit opera-
tion.
For example, this can be used effectively when real-
time-recording a track for a song.
[INC]/ [DEC] keys
Use these when you wish to make fine adjustments to
the value.
1Realtime-record a track. (Take 1)
2Once again, realtime-record on the same track. (Take
2)
3Press the [COMPARE] key. The key will light, and
[VALUE] dial
take 1 will be recalled.
Use this when you wish to make large changes in a
value.
4Press the [COMPARE] key once again. The key will
go dark, and take 2 will be recalled.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5If after recording two different takes on the same
track, you record a third, the Compare function will
now alternate between the second and third takes.
Recording a fourth take will mean that Compare
now alternates between takes three and four, and so
on. In this fashion, Compare always alternates
between the last two recorded passes that are made
on the same track.
In this way, the Compare function lets you recall the
previous recording or the previous state of event edit-
ing.
The Compare function is not available in Global,
Media and Sampling modes.
Keyboard input
When inputting a note name or velocity value as the
value of a parameter, you can use the keyboard to
input the setting. Hold down the [ENTER] key and
play the note that you wish to enter as a value. The
note name (number) or velocity value will be input.
When the GLOBAL 5.1: DKit page or SEQ 5.1: RPPR,
RPPR Setup page is displayed, you can hold down the
[ENTER] key and play a note to recall the settings that
have been assigned to the note you played.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Start
Turning the power on/ off
Before you turn on the power, make sure that the
•
When using Sampling mode (if the separately sold
desired connections have been made as described
EXB-SMPL option is installed) utility commands
(“Move Sample,” “Move MS,” “Conv.To Prog,”
“Time Slice,” etc.) to simultaneously modify
programs or drum kits.
1. Turning the power on
The mode and page that will be selected when the
power is turned on
1Press the TR’s [POWER] switch to turn on the
power.
The state of this instrument when the power is turned
on will depend on the setting of “Power On Mode”
(GLOBAL 1.1: System, Preference page).
The LCD screen will display the name of your
model, and the software version.
(The following graphic shows the factory-set LCD
screen . The version number is subject to change
without notice.)
If “Power On Mode” is Reset (factory setting), this
instrument will automatically selects the Combination
mode 1.1: Play.
If “Power On Mode” is Memorize, this instrument
will be in the mode and page that were last selected
when the power was turned off.
The Memorize setting will remember the mode and
page that were last selected, the combination number
that was last selected in Combination mode, and the
program number that was last selected in Program
mode. If another mode is selected when the power is
turned on, you can press the [COMBI] key or [PROG]
key to select the 1.1: Play page with the last-selected
combination number or program number.
2Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp.
3Raise this instrument’s [VOLUME] slider to an
appropriate level, and adjust the volume of your
powered monitors or stereo amp.
2. Turning the power off
LCD screen messages when separately sold
options are installed (When the power is turned
on)
1Set this instrument’s [VOLUME] slider and the
volume of your powered monitor or stereo amp to
zero.
This instrument allows you to install separately sold
options.
2Turn off the power of your powered monitor or
stereo amp.
When the power is turned on, the type of installed
options will be displayed. After installing an option, be
sure to check this display to verify that the option was
installed correctly. If the option is not displayed here
even though it was installed, it was not installed cor-
rectly. Turn off the power and re-install the option.
(☞For details on installing an option, refer to PG p.260)
3Press this instrument’s [POWER] switch to turn off
the power.
Never turn off the power while data is being writ-
ten into internal memory.
If the power is turned off while processing is being
performed, memory write operations will not be
completed correctly. If this occurs, this instrument
will automatically initialize its internal memory so
thatitwilloperatecorrectly.Thisisnotamalfunction.
While data is being written, the LCD screen will
indicate “Now writing into internal memory.”
Data is written into internal memory by the fol-
lowing operations.
OPTIONS
EXB-SMPL:
The EXB-SMPL option is installed.
•
•
•
Writing (updating) a Program, Combination,
Global Setting, Drum Kit, or Arpeggio Patterns
Loading Program, Combination, Global Setting,
Drum Kit, or Arpeggio Patterns data in Media mode
Receiving a MIDI data dump for Program,
Combination, Global Setting, Drum Kit data, or
Arpeggio Patterns
SIMM:
Slot1 (**MB)/ Slot2 (**MB): SIMM’s are installed in
SIMM slots 1 and/ or 2. The capacity of each SIMM is
shown in parentheses.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the demo songs
From the powered-off state, if you turn on the
power while holding down the [MENU] key and
[EXIT] key, the Load All (Preload PCG and Demo
Songs) operation will be executed automatically.
(The LCD screen will show a message of “Now
Writing Internal Memory.”) This will load all PCG
data and demo song data. Never turn off the
power while the data is being loaded.
Loading demo playback data
The TR contains demo songs (and preloaded data).
This data can be loaded in Global mode.
1Press the [GLOBAL] key (the key will light).
You will enter Global mode.
Verify that the GLOBAL 1.1: System page is dis-
played. If it is not displayed, press the [EXIT] key.
2Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the Utility
menu.
Selecting and playing a demo
song in the Sequencer mode
3Press the [F7] (“
”) key to select “Load Pre-
load/Demo Data,” and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
1Press the [SEQ] key (the key will light).
You will enter Sequencer mode.
2Access the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Play/REC page.
Play/REC page
SEQ 1.1:
Play/REC
Song Select
A dialog box will appear.
4Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the data that
you want to load.
If the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Play/ REC page does not
appear, select it as follows.
1) Press the [MENU] key.
The LCD screen will show a list of the pages in
Sequencer mode.
In the “Kind” field, select the data that you want to
load.
In this case, select All (Preload PCG and Demo
Songs). When you execute the Load operation, the
demo song data and preloaded data will be loaded.
2) Press the [F1] key to select “P/R,” and press the
[F8] (“OPEN”) key.
5Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
A dialog box will ask you for confirmation.
3) Press the [F1] key. The SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Play/
REC page will be displayed.
3Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ] to choose “Song
Select.”
The song name will be highlighted.
6Press the [F8] (“OK”) key once again.
4Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys or other VALUE control-
The preloaded data and demo song data will be
loaded.
lers to select the demo song that you wish to play.
5Press the [START/STOP] key.
Never turn off the power while the data is being
loaded.
The key will blink and the selected song will play.
6If you wish to stop playback, press the [START/
If the Memory Protected dialog box appears, un-
check the memory protect setting, and perform the
STOP] key once again.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a cue list
Here’s how to playback the demonstration cue list. By
using a cue list, you can repeatedly play multiple
songs that you specify in the cue list, or play songs
1Press the [MENU] key.
2Press the [F2] key to select “Cue,” and then press
the [F8] (“OPEN”) key.
The SEQ 2.1: Cue List, Setup&Play page will appear.
3Press the [START/STOP] key.
4To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] key
once again.
If the last step is End, playback will stop automati-
cally when it reaches that point. If the last step is
Continue to Step01, playback will return to the first
step and continue.
To select a cue list, choose “Cue List Select,” and
use the same procedure as when selecting a song.
Refer to step 4above.
Contents of the preloaded data and demo songs
Preload PCG
•
Preloaded data (programs, combinations, drum
kits, arpeggio patterns, global settings)
When you load the preloaded data, it will be writ-
ten into internal memory. This data is preserved
even when the power is turned off.
When this data is loaded, the current PCG data in
the TR will be replaced. If you do not want to lose
Demo Songs
•
Demonstration song and demonstration cue list
data
This data is loaded into the internal sequencer
memory. The data will be lost when the power is
turned off.
When you load All Demo Songs, any data cur-
rently in the sequencer will be rewritten. If you
wish to keep this data, you must first save it on an
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting and playing a program
In Program mode you can select and play a program
Selecting the program bank
In Program mode, you can switch banks to select pro-
grams from another bank.
With the factory settings, banks A, B, C, D and G, g(d)
contain programs. (☞ table bellow)
from banks A–D, G, g(d). Here we will show how to
select preset programs. Select various programs and
hear how they sound.
5Press a BANK [A]–[GM] key to select a bank.
The key will light, and the selected bank will be dis-
played in the left of the LCD screen. For example to
select bank B, press the BANK [B] key. (The [B] key
will light, and the upper left of the LCD screen will
indicate Bank B.)
Selecting a program
1Press the [PROG] key (the key will light).
You will enter Program mode. Make sure that the
upper line of the LCD screen indicates “PROG 1.1:
Play.”
Bank
Prog. No.
Explanation
A, B, C, D
000…127
for preloaded programs
(for user programs)
Category
Program Bank
Program Select
G
001…128
GM programs
g(d)
(☞VNL)
GM2 drum programs
A, B, C, D
With the factory settings, these banks contain
a wide variety of preloaded programs that
use the internal PCM ROM multisamples,
effects, and arpeggio patterns.
Selecting a program number
2Make sure that “Program Select” is selected.
If it is not selected, use the cursor keys [ ], [ ],
128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank
A–D (for a total of 512).
[
], [ ] to highlight the program name in “Pro-
gram Select.”
G, g(d) These banks contain 128 GM programs and 9
GM drum programs that are compatible
with the GM sound map. The programs of
these banks are read-only. Bank G contains
the GM programs. G lets you select 128 pro-
grams numbered from 001–128, and g(d) lets
you select nine drum programs (☞VNL).
Each time you press the [GM] key, the bank
will alternate as shown below.
3Use the VALUE controllers to select the program
that you wish to play.
You can use the following methods to select a pro-
gram.
•
•
•
Rotate the [VALUE] dial.
Press the [INC] or [DEC] key.
Use numeric keys [0]–[9] to specify the number,
and press the [ENTER] key.
G→g(d)→G→g(d)→G…
4Audition the sound.
☞ For details of the program names etc., refer to
Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you
selected.
“VNL” (Voice Name List).
Alternatively, you can press the [AUDITION] key
(the key will light) to turn on the Audition function
and the TR will automatically play a riff (phrase)
suitable for the selected program.
With the factory settings, the Audition function
can be used only on the preloaded programs of
banks A–D, and the preset programs G, g(d).
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting programs by category
Using 10’s HOLD to select programs
You can select programs by categories such as key-
board, organ, bass, and drums.
You can fix the ten’s place of the program number as
you select programs.
With the factory settings, all the preloaded programs
are organized into sixteen categories. You can choose a
category, and then select from the programs in that cat-
egory.
1Press the [./HOLD] key to make the display indi-
cate
.
The ten’s place of the program number will be held
(fixed).
On this instrument, you can use one of the following
two methods to select programs by category.
Select by Category
1Make sure that PROG 1.1: Play is displayed.
2Press the [CATEGORY] key.
2By pressing a numeric key [0]–[9], you can input
the one’s place in a single action.
3You can use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to change the
ten’s place.
4To cancel the 10’s HOLD function, press [./HOLD]
The Select by Category dialog box will appear. The
categories are displayed in the left side of the screen,
and a list of the programs in the selected category
are displayed in the right side.
to erase the
display.
Using a connected switch to select programs
A separately sold on/ off-type switch (such as the sepa-
rately sold Korg PS-1) can be connected to the rear
panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH connector, and assigned
Program
Category
3Use the [F1] (“
(“ ”), and [F4] (“
desired category.
”), [F2] (“
”), [F3]
Selecting programs from a MIDI device
”) keys to select the
MIDI program change messages can be transmitted
from an external MIDI device, and received by this
instrument to select programs.(☞PG p.234)
4Use the [ ], [ ] cursor keys to select the desired
program.
5To execute, press the [F8] (“OK”) key. To cancel
without executing, press the [F7] (“Cancel”) key.
Cat. HOLD (Category Hold)
1Press the [./HOLD] key to display
The category will be held.
Category
.
Program
Select
2Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to choose
“Category,” and use the VALUE controllers to
specify the category.
3Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to choose
“Program Select,” and use the VALUE controllers
to successively select programs in that category.
4To exit the Category Hold function, press the [./
HOLD] key twice to erase the
display.
In PROG 1.1: Play, pressing the [./ HOLD] key will
cycle through → cancel.
→
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting and playing a combination
In Combination mode you can select and play a combi-
nation from banks A–C. Select various combinations
and hear how they sound.
A, B, C
With the factory settings, these banks con-
tain a wide variety of preloaded combina-
tions that use multiple programs, effects,
and arpeggio patterns.
128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank
A–C (for a total of 384).
Selecting a combination
☞ For details of the combination names etc., refer to
“VNL” (Voice Name List).
1Press the [COMBI] key (the key will light).
You will enter Combination mode. Make sure that
the upper line of the LCD screen indicates “COMBI
1.1: Play.”
Selecting combinations by category
You can select combinations from sixteen categories in
the same way as for programs.
With the factory settings, all the preloaded combina-
tions are organized into sixteen categories. You can
choose a category, and then select from the combina-
tions in that category.
Category
Combination
Bank
Combi Select
Selecting a combination number
2Make sure that “Combi Select” is selected.
Using 10’s HOLD to select combinations
If it is not selected, use the cursor keys [ ], [ ],
You can fix the ten’s place of the combination number,
so that a combination can be selected simply by press-
ing a numeric key once to change the one’s place.
[
], [ ] to highlight the combination name in
“Combi Select.”
3Use the VALUE controllers to select the combina-
tion that you wish to play.
4Audition the sound.
Using a connected switch to select combinations
Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you
selected.
A separately sold on/ off type foot switch such as the
Korg PS-1 can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGN-
ABLE SWITCH jack, and used to select combinations.
Selecting the combination bank
In Combination mode, you can switch banks to select
combinations from another bank.
With the factory settings, banks A, B, and C contain
combinations. (☞ table bellow)
Selecting combinations from a MIDI device
MIDI program change messages can be transmitted
from an external MIDI device, and received by this
instrument to select combinations. (☞PG p.234)
5Press a BANK [A]–[C] key to select a bank.
The key will light, and the selected bank will be dis-
played in the left of the LCD screen. For example to
select bank B, press the BANK [B] key. (The [B] key
will light, and the upper left of the LCD screen will
indicate Bank B.)
Bank
Prog. No.
Explanation
A, B, C
000…127
for preloaded combinations
(for user combinations)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using controllers to modify the sound
The TR provides various controllers – a joystick, the
SW1 and SW2 switches, and the REALTIME CON-
TROL [1], [2], [3], [4] knobs – that let you modify the
tone, pitch, volume, or effects in realtime while you
play.
You can specify the way in which the [SW1] and [SW2]
keys will operate: either Toggle, when the assigned
function will be switched on/ off each time the key is
pressed, or Momentary, when the assigned function
will be switched on only as long as you hold down the
key.
Each time you select a program or combination, try out
these controllers to hear how they affect the sound.
The function of the [SW1] and [SW2] keys can be
verified for Program mode in the 1.1: Play, Pro-
gram page, or for Combination mode in the 1.1:
Tonal changes etc. created using these controllers
can be recorded on the internal sequencer or on an
external MIDI sequencer.
When you write a program or combination, the
on/ off status of the [SW1] and [SW2] keys is
saved.
Joystick
For details on making these settings, refer to “Set-
The Lock function
1Select program bank A001: Acoustic Piano, and
play the keyboard.
JS(+X): Move the joystick toward the right to apply an
effect. Normally this is used to control the
pitch (bend up).
JS(–X): Move the joystick toward the left to apply an
effect. Normally this is used to control the
pitch (bend down).
To select a program, make sure that you are in Pro-
gram mode, and press the Bank [A] key, numeric
key [1], and then the [ENTER] key.
2Move the joystick toward yourself (the –Y direc-
tion).
The modulation will deepen, and at the same time,
resonance will be applied to give a unique character
to the sound.
JS(+Y): Move the joystick away from yourself to apply
an effect. Normally this is used to control the
oscillator LFO (vibrato).
JS(–Y): Move the joystick toward yourself to apply an
effect. Normally this is used to control filter
LFO (wah).
3While holding the joystick toward yourself, press
the [SW2] screen (The [SW2] key will light).
The tone at this point will be maintained. (Lock
function)
You can use the Lock function of [SW 1] or [SW 2]
keys to hold the effect in the current joystick posi-
tion, before the joystick is released to the center
position. For the procedure, refer to “The lock
function.”
You can use the joystick as a source for alternate
modulation or effect dynamic modulation, to con-
trol program parameters or effect parameters.
SW1, SW2
4Release the joystick, and play the keyboard.
The tone will stay the same as it was when the
[SW2] key was pressed. Moving the joystick toward
yourself will not affect the sound.
You can use these keys as sources for alternate modula-
tion or effect dynamic modulation to control program
parameters or effect parameters.
In the lower part of the LCD screen, SW2 will indi-
cate JS-Y Lock. This means that the function of the
[SW2] key is set to JS-Y Lock. (It will operate as a
Toggle switch.)
These switches can also be used to switch the octave, to
turn portamento on/ off, or to lock the position of the
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the function of the [SW1] or [SW2] key is set to
JS X Lock, JS+Y Lock, or JS-Y Lock, the tone that
was heard when the joystick is tilted can be main-
tained even after the joystick is returned to the
center position.
Knob [2]: RESONANCE/ HPF
Adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or the
cutoff frequency of a high pass filter.
The content that is controlled will depend on the filter
type specified by the program.
Similarly, there is an AfterT Lock function that
locks the aftertouch effect. (☞PG p.224)
By adjusting the filter resonance level, you can increase
or decrease the resonance level to add a unique charac-
ter to the sound.
5Press the [SW2] key once again to defeat the lock.
In many programs and combinations, the joystick -
Y axis lock function is assigned to the [SW2] key.
Adjusting the cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter
will modify the thickness of the sound from which the
low frequency range has been filtered out.
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3],
[4]
Level
These knobs can be used to control the filter cutoff fre-
quency and resonance, the amp and filter EG, volume,
portamento time, pan, pitch LFO, or the send levels to
the master effects, etc.
LPF
HPF
Cutoff
1Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] key
to switch the function of the realtime controllers to
A-mode, B-mode, or C-mode.
frequency
Knob [3]: EG-INTENSITY
Each time you press the key, A-mode, B-mode or C-
mode will be selected alternately, and the corre-
sponding LED will light.
Adjust the filter EG intensity (the depth at which the
filter EG is applied).
Rotating the knob will affect the depth of the filter EG.
Normally, rotating the knob toward the left will make
the filter EG apply less deeply, and rotating it toward
the right will make the filter EG apply more deeply.
Since the filter EG will operate based on the cutoff fre-
quency of the filter, knobs [1] and [3] will work
together to control the tonal changes produced by the
filter.
Level
2Rotate the desired knob to control the sound, etc.
Time
A-mode controls
In A-mode, knobs [1]–[4] will control/ edit the follow-
ing functions.
Placing the knobs in the center (12 o’clock) posi-
tion will produce the values specified by the pro-
gram parameters.
Knob [4]: EG-RELEASE
Adjust the EG release times of the filter and amp. This
will determine the time from note-off until the sound
disappears.
Knob [1]: LPF CUTOFF
When you adjust the knob, the release times of the fil-
ter EG and the amp EG will change. Normally, rotating
the knob toward the left will shorten the release time,
and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the
release time.
Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter.
When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter, the
brightness of the sound will change. The effect will
depend on the settings of the program parameters, but
normally, rotating the knob toward the left will darken
the sound, and rotating it toward the right will
brighten it.
note-on
Attack Level
note-off
Break Level
Level
Level
Release Level
Time
Sustain Level
LPF
Frequency
Release Time
Low
High
Slope Time
Decay Time
Attack Time
Cutoff
frequency
Start Level
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-mode controls
Foot pedals
You can control parameters such as volume, porta-
mento time, pan or filter and amp EG, pitch LFO, and
master effect send levels etc.
Damper Pedal
The B-mode function settings are made for each indi-
vidual program, combination, or song.
In Sampling mode, the B-mode functions are set for the
entire mode (if the EXB-SMPL option is installed)
A separately sold Korg switch-type damper pedal such
as the DS-1H can be connected to this instrument. If a
DS-1H is connected, it will function as a half-damper
pedal. The half-damper function cannot be controlled
by other pedals.
C-mode control
You can control the effect of the arpeggiator in real-
time. For details on operation, refer to p.27.
Assignable Foot Switch
A separately sold on/ off switch such as the Korg PS-1
foot switch can be connected to this instrument, allow-
ing you to turn an assigned function on/ off by step-
ping on the foot switch.
Viewing the parameters that are assigned to
[SW1], [SW2] keys, and the REALTIME CONTROLS
B mode
The function of the foot switch is assigned in GLOBAL
Assignable Foot Pedal
In Program and Combination modes, the B-mode func-
tions of the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs [1], [2], [3],
and [4] and [SW1]/ [SW2] keys can be verified in the
1.1: Play page.
A separately sold Korg expression pedal such as the
EXP-2 foot controller or XVP-10 EXP/ VOL pedal can
be connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL
jack, and used to apply an effect.
The function of the foot pedal is assigned in GLOBAL
Functions assigned to the
[SW1] and [SW2] keys
Functions assigned
to Knob1–4
Keyboard
Velocity
The force with which you initially strike a note can
apply an effect.
Normally this is used to control volume, or the speed
or sensitivity of the EG.
After Touch
This effect can be applied by varying pressure on a key
that is already being held down.
Normally this is used to control volume, tone (cutoff
frequency), or LFO sensitivity etc.
Note Number
Varying amounts of an effect will be applied depend-
ing on the position of the key on the keyboard.
Normally this is used to control volume, tone (cutoff
frequency), LFO sensitivity, and EG sensitivity etc.
This can be used as a source for alternate modula-
tion or effect dynamic modulation, to control pro-
gram parameters or effect parameters.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the arpeggiator while you play
The arpeggiator is a function that automatically gener-
ates arpeggios (broken chords). Most arpeggiators pro-
duce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the
Using the arpeggiator in Program
keyboard.
mode
1Press the [PROG] key to enter Program mode, and
As you select various programs, you will notice that
the [ARP ON/ OFF] key LED will light for some
tor”) Play the keyboard of the TR and the arpeggio
will start.
The chord you played on
the keyboard is sounded as
an arpeggio (broken chord)
For other programs, you can press the [ARP ON/
OFF] key (the key will light) to turn on the arpeggia-
In addition to this, the TR’s arpeggiator is a polyphonic
tor. Arpeggios will begin sounding when you play
arpeggiator that is able to produce a variety of chordal
the keyboard.
transformations or phrases based on the pitch or tim-
ing of the notes you play on the keyboard. These func-
tions let you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range
of patterns including drum or bass phrases, and guitar
or keyboard backing riffs. It is also effective to use the
arpeggiator as part of the sound-creating process when
creating subtly-moving pads, synth-sounds, or sound
effects.
2As described in the following sections “Settings
using controllers” and “Settings in the LCD
screen,” move the controllers or modify the param-
eters to change the way in which the arpeggios are
played.
In addition, the TR features a Dual Arpeggiator that
lets you simultaneously use two arpeggio patterns in
Combination mode and Sequencer mode. You can take
advantage of this in many ways, such as applying sep-
arate arpeggio patterns to a drums program and a bass
program, or using keyboard split or velocity to switch
between two arpeggio patterns.
Settings using controllers
Arpeggiator on/ off
Each time you press the [ARP ON/OFF] key, the
arpeggiator will be switched on/off.
When this is on, the key will light, and playing the
The TR provides five preset arpeggio patterns (the
standard UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and RANDOM),
and lets you program and store 216 user arpeggio pat-
terns. With the factory settings, these contain a wide
variety of preload user arpeggio patterns (☞VNL). An
arpeggio pattern that you create can also be stored as a
keyboard will start the selected arpeggio pattern.
The on/ off status is saved when you write the pro-
gram, Combination.
In Combination and Song, depending on the
arpeggiator A, B settings, the arpeggio may not
start when you press the [ARP ON/ OFF] key to
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can control the tone effectively by simulta-
neously adjusting the REALTIME CONTROLS A-
mode [1] (LPF CUTOFF), [2] (RESONANCE/
HPF), and [3] (EG-INTENSITY) knobs.
Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo
1Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] key
to make the right “C” LED light.
2Rotate the [TEMPO] knob to adjust the tempo.
The “ꢀ =” value in the upper right of the LCD screen
will change. You can set this in the range of 40–240.
The [SELECT] key LED will blink at quarter-note (ꢀ )
intervals.
Settings in the LCD screen
In PROG 1.1: Play, press the [F3] key to select the
Arp. Play page.
You can also Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [
]
to select “ꢀ =,” input the tempo using numeric keys
[0]–[9], and press the [ENTER] key to set the tempo.
Alternatively, you can set the tempo using the
[VALUE] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys. The tempo
will blink at the specified tempo.
You can also tap the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key (Tap
Selecting an arpeggio pattern
An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset arpeg-
gio patterns P000–P004 and user arpeggio patterns
U000 (INT)–215 (User). With the factory settings,
U000–199 (INT) contain a wide variety of preset user
arpeggio patterns (☞VNL)
The Tempo setting is saved when you write the
program.
The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the
“Reso (Resolution)” setting (1.1: Play, Arp. Play
page, 6.1: Ed–Arp., Arpeg. Setup page).
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Pattern,” and use the [VALUE] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to select the arpeggio pattern. To select
a user arpeggio pattern, use numeric keys [0]–[9] to
input the pattern number, and press the [ENTER]
key.
If “MIDI Clock” (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI) is set to
External or Ext-USB, the display will indicate “ꢀ =
EXT.” The tempo will be synchronized to an exter-
nal MIDI device, and it will not be possible to
adjust the tempo on the TR.
Adjusting the length of the arpeggio notes
Changing the timing value of the arpeggio
notes
1Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] key
to make the right “C” LED light.
The “Reso (Resolution)” parameter in the LCD screen
lets you set the timing value of the arpeggiated notes in
a range of ꢁ 3 – ꢀ .
2Rotate the [ARP-GATE] knob to adjust the dura-
tion of the arpeggiated notes.
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Reso,” and use the [VALUE] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to specify the spacing of the arpeggi-
ated notes.
Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the
notes, and rotating it toward the right will lengthen
the notes. At the center position (12 o’clock), the
note length will be as specified by the program
parameter “Gate” (6.1: Ed-Arp., Arpeg. Setup
page).
Selecting the octave range in which the
arpeggio is sounded
Use the “Octave” in the LCD screen to specify the
range of octaves in which the arpeggio will be sounded
The knob setting is saved when you write the pro-
gram.
You can control the effect by simultaneously
adjusting the REALTIME CONTROLS A-mode [4]
(EG-RELEASE) knob.
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Octave,” and use the [VALUE] dial or [INC]/
[DEC] keys to specify the range of octaves in
which the arpeggio will be sounded.
Adjusting the strength of the arpeggio notes
1Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] key
Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the
pitches in the chord you played
to make the right “C” LED light.
2Rotate the [ARP-VELOCITY] knob to adjust the
strength of the arpeggiated notes.
You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will
be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you
played (regardless of the order in which you actually
played the notes), or in the order in which you played
the notes.
Rotating the knob toward the left will make the
notes weaker, and rotating the knob toward the
right will make the notes stronger. At the center
position (12 o’clock), the velocity will be as specified
by the program parameter “Velocity” (6.1: Ed-Arp.,
Arpeg. Setup page).
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the
“Sort” check box, and use the [VALUE] dial or the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to make the setting.
The knob setting is saved when you write the pro-
gram.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checked: the arpeggio will sound each note in the
order of its pitch, regardless of the order in which
you actually played the notes.
Unchecked: the arpeggio will sound each note in
the order in which you actually played the notes.
Using the arpeggiator as you
play in Combination mode
In Combination mode the TR provides dual arpeggia-
tors, allowing you to run two arpeggio patterns simul-
taneously.
Letting the arpeggio continue playing even
after you take your hand off the keyboard
You can select whether the arpeggio will continue
playing when you take your hand off the keyboard, or
whether the arpeggio will stop playing when you take
your hand off the keyboard.
1Press the [COMBI] key to enter Combination
As you select various combinations, you will notice
that the [ARP ON/ OFF] key will light for some
arpeggiator will start.
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Latch,” and use the [VALUE] dial or the [INC]/
[DEC] keys to make the setting.
Checked: The arpeggio will continue playing even
after you remove your hand from the keyboard.
Unchecked: The arpeggio will stop playing when
you remove your hand from the keyboard.
For other combinations, you can press the [ARP
ON/ OFF] key (the key will light) to turn on the
arpeggiator.
2As described in the preceding section “Settings
using controllers” and the following section “Set-
tings in the LCD screen,” move the controllers or
modify the parameters to change the way in which
the arpeggios are played.
Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your key-
board timing
You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the
moment you play the keyboard, or whether it will
always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock
tempo.
The [ARP ON/ OFF] key and the REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [TEMPO], [ARP-GATE], and
[ARP-VELOCITY] knobs are valid for both arpeg-
giators A and B. Their state will be memorized
when the combination is written.
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Key Sync.,” and use the [VALUE] dial or the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to make the setting.
Checked: When you take your hand completely off
of the keyboard and then play the first note-on, the
arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning. This
setting is suitable when you want the arpeggio to
start from the beginning of the measure as you are
playing in realtime.
Settings in the LCD screen
In COMBI 1.1: Play, press the [F4] key to select the
Arp. Play A page, and make settings for arpeggia-
tor A.
Unchecked: The arpeggio will always be synchro-
nized to the MIDI clock tempo.
In COMBI 1.1: Play, press the [F5] key to select the
Arp. Play B page, and make settings for arpeggiator
B.
Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the
notes you play
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Keyboard” check box, and use the [VALUE] dial
or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to make the setting.
Checked: The notes you play on the keyboard and
the notes played by the arpeggiator will both sound.
Unchecked: Only the arpeggio notes will sound.
Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run
Use the “Arpeggiator Run” check boxes to specify the
arpeggiator(s) that you want to run. The arpeggiator(s)
that are checked here will operate when the [ARP ON/
OFF] key is on.
However, the arpeggiator will play a timbre only if the
table displayed beside the check boxes assigns arpeg-
giator A or B to a Timbre 1–8. These settings are made
Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B
For each arpeggiator A and B, you can make settings
for “Pattern,” “Reso (Resolution),” “Octave,” “Sort,”
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the structure of a user arpeggio
pattern
Let’s see how combination C053: Echo Jamm is con-
structed.
Other settings for the arpeggiator
You can also set “Gate,” “Velocity,” “Swing,” and
“Scan Zone.” These parameters are set in PROG 6.1:
1Select combination C053: Echo Jamm, and look at
the Arp. Play A page and Arp. play B page.
Linking the arpeggiator to program, combinations
You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings writ-
ten in a program or combination will also be selected
when you switch programs or combinations, or
whether the arpeggiator status will not change when
you switch programs or combinations.
With the factory settings, the former is selected. Use
the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio
pattern running, and change only the program sound.
This setting is made in “Auto Arp.” (GLOBAL 1.1: Sys-
tem, Basic).
Creating a user arpeggio pattern
Arpeggio patterns that you create can be written to
U000 (INT)–215 (User).
These can be created in GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern
•
As you can see from the “Timbre Assign” table in
the upper right, arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre
4 and 8, and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbre 2.
When you play the keyboard the U119 (INT): Dr-
BigBeats 2 arpeggio pattern will play the program
B084: Drum’n’Bass Kit of timbre 4. The U039
(INT): Gt-Stab Rhythm arpeggio pattern will play
the program B108: Funkin’ Guitar of timbre 2.
•
•
If you uncheck “Arpeggiator Run A” or
“Arpeggiator Run B,” the unchecked arpeggiator
will stop.
If you check it once again and play the keyboard,
the arpeggiator will begin running.
Look at the COMBI 6.1: Ed-Arp., Zone page, and
you will see that the A keys “Btm” and “Top” are
set so that arpeggiator A will operate only for B3
and lower keys, and that the B “Top Key” and
“Bottom Key” are set so that arpeggiator B will
operate only for C4 and higher keys.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with the RPPR (Realtime Pattern
Play/ Recording) function
This instrument’s Sequencer mode provides an RPPR
Shutdown Keys:
(Realtime Pattern Play/Recording) function.
When you play a key in the range of C–1 – C2, the cur-
rently-playing pattern will stop.
Using the RPPR function, each note of the keyboard
can be assigned to a preset pattern or user pattern and
a track that will play the assigned pattern. You can
then playback the assigned pattern in realtime (and
record it, if desired) simply by playing a note. (Preset
patterns suitable for playing by the drum track are
already provided in internal memory.)
Pattern Assignable:
A pattern and track can be assigned to each of the 72
keys in the range of C#2–C8. If you do not assign a key,
it can be used to play as usual.
Here we will explain how to play a demo song using
the RPPR function.
As in the example shown in the following diagram,
you can make one key play a drums pattern, another
key a bass phrase, and yet another key play guitar
chords, all by specifying a different pattern and track
for each key.
2Press the [SEQ] key (the key will light) to enter
Sequencer mode, and access the SEQ 1.1: Play/
REC, Play/REC page.
88 Keys
76 Keys
61 Keys
3In “Song Select,” select 001:Midnight Sun.
C-1
G9
Select the song as described in “Selecting and play-
Pattern Assignable
C#2 ... C 8
Shutdown Keys
C-1 ... C2
Pattern P000 Track01 (Drums Program)
Pattern U000 Track02 (Bass Program)
Pattern P001 Track01 (Drums Program)
Pattern U001 Track02 (Bass Program)
Pattern U002 Track03 (Guitar Program)
4Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked.
Checked: The specified RPPR (set in SEQ 5.1:PPPR,
RPPR Setup) will function.
Unchecked: RPPR will not function. Operation will
be as in normal Sequencer mode.
5Press a key.
The pattern assigned to that key will playback.
In some cases, the pattern will continue playing
after you release your hand from the keyboard. You
can stop playback either by pressing that key once
again, or by pressing a key in the area of C2 or
below.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple program editing
By operating the performance editor and the realtime
Amp Level: Indicates the amp level. This will adjust
controllers you can easily and intuitively modify the
sound of a program.
the volume of the entire program.
Attack Time: Indicates the attack time of the filter EG
and amp EG. This will adjust the speed of the attack
from note-on.
Program editing refers to the process of modifying the
parameters that make up a program, in order to mod-
ify the sound or change the controller, effect settings
etc.
In order to maximize the effect of the Attack Time
adjustment, the amp EG Start Level, Attack Level,
Start Level Modulation, and Attack Time Modula-
tion parameters are also adjusted.
More detailed editing can be performed in PROG
2.1: Ed-Basic – 7.2: Ed-MasterFx.
Decay Time: Indicates the decay time and slope time
of the filter EG and amp EG.
IFX Balance: This simultaneously adjusts the “W/D
(Wet/ Dry)” balance of all insert effect.
Performance Edit
By using the eight sliders of the Performance Editor,
you can make overall adjustments to the sound. When
you move a slider, multiple program parameters are
adjusted simultaneously.
MFX Balance: This simultaneously adjusts the
Return 1 and 2 parameters of the master effects.
Depending on the settings of the program parame-
ters, the result may not be noticeable.
1Press the [PROG] key (the key will light) to enter
Program mode.
5If you want to save the modified sound, select the
utility menu command “Write Program,” and
2Press the [F2] (“P.Edit”) key.
The Perform. Edit page will appear.
It is a good idea to edit the name when you write
the program.
If you want to overwrite the program using the
same program number, press the [REC/ WRITE]
key and then press the [F8] key.
The edited content will be lost if you select another
program or turn off the power before saving.
3Select the Program.
4Use the Performance Editor to adjust the sound.
(☞PG p.3)
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select the
desired performance editor slider, and use the
VALUE controller to adjust the setting.
Realtime controls
The REATIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs can be used
to edit parameters such as the filter cutoff frequency,
resonance, the amp and filter EG, volume, portamento
time, pan, pitch LFO, and master effect send level etc.
If you want to reset the value, press numeric key
[0] and then press the [ENTER] key to restore the
previous setting.
Octave: Indicates the octave setting.
You can also modify settings for the arpeggiator.
Pitch Stretch: Simultaneously adjusts the transpose
and tune settings of the oscillator. This allows you to
produce a variety of tonal changes without losing
the character of the original sound.
If CC#70–79 are assigned to REALTIME CON-
TROLS A-mode or B-mode, the sound edited by
knobs [1]–[4] can be saved by the Program Write
C-mode can also be saved.
This is particularly effective for acoustic-type pro-
grams such as guitar, bass, or piano. Select various
programs and try this out.
OSC Balance: Adjusts the level balance between
oscillators 1 and 2.
For programs whose “Mode (Oscillator Mode)”
(PROG 2.1: Ed-Basic, Prog Basic page) setting is
Single, oscillator 2 will not sound. Only the level
of oscillator 1 will change. For a Drums program,
this performance editor will have no effect.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple combination editing
A combination is a set of multiple (up to eight) pro-
grams, and allows you to create complex sounds that
could not be produced by a single program.
Selecting the program for a timbre
3Select the Prog page.
Press the [F2] (“Prog”) key. Now you can specify the
programs for timbres 1–8.
Combination editing refers to the process of modify-
ing the sound of a combination by changing the pro-
gram selected for each timbre or adjusting the
keyboard range and velocity range, or by modifying
the controller, and effect settings.
4Now let’s change the program of timbre 2 to a dif-
ferent program.
Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select
“Program Select” for timbre 2 (it will be high-
lighted).
You can edit a combination in COMBI 2.1: Ed-Prog/
Mix–7.2: Ed-MasterFX, but can also make settings for
“Program Select, “Pan,” and “Volume” in COMBI 1.1
Play as well.
“Program
Select”
An example of editing
Timbre 1
Timbre 2
As an example, here’s how to do some simple editing
on combination Bank C064: Modern Piano.
You can directly select the program for a timbre by
holding down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key and
pressing the nearest [F1]–[F8] key. You can select
pan or volume in the same way.
1Press the [COMBI] key (the key will light) to enter
Combination mode.
2Select Bank C064: Modern Piano.
For this example, select D003: Legato Strings. This
is a layered combination with piano and rich
strings. Then consecutively press the [D] key, the [3]
key, and the [ENTER] key.
Alternatively, the program for a timbre can be
selected by category.
This combination layers (simultaneously sounds)
the programs of timbre 1 and timbre 2. Timbre 1
sounds C001: Attack Piano, a piano with a crisp
attack. Timbre 2 sounds D017: Vintage EP, a classic
electric piano. These two programs are layered to
produce a piano-type sound that you may have
heard in various contexts.
Choose “Program Select,” and press the [CATE-
GORY] key.
The Select by Category dialog box will appear.
A timbre consists a of program together with mul-
tiple parameters that control that program. A com-
bination can use up to eight of these timbres.
Use the [F1] (“
”), [F2] (“
”), [F3]
(“ ”), and [F4] (“
”) keys to select the
desired category. For example if you want to select
string-type programs rather than the 00: Keyboard
category shown in the above display, press the [F2]
(“
”) key three times to select 03: Strings.
You can use the cursor keys [ ], [ ] to successively
select string-type programs.
When you are happy with the selected program,
press the [F8] (“OK”) key to finalize your selection.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the program sound of just one timbre
Adjusting the volume while preserving the volume
balance between timbres
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, and press the [F7] key to choose “Solo
Selected Timbre.” Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, and press the [F7] key to choose “Hold Bal-
ance.” Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Now you will hear only the program sound of the
currently selected timbre. The lower part of the LCD
screen will indicate [Solo].
The upper right of the LCD screen will indicate
“Hold Bal.”
To cancel this setting, choose “Solo Selected Tim-
bre” once again and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
When you change the “Volume” value of any tim-
bre, the volume of all timbres will also change to
preserve the volume balance at the time you
checked the Hold Balance setting.
To cancel this setting, choose “Hold Balance” once
again and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Adjusting the stereo location of the sound
5Select the Mixer page.
Press the [F3] (“Mix”) key. Here you can adjust the
pan and volume for timbres 1–8.
Writing the combination
8If you want to save the sound you modified, select
the utility menu command “Write Combination,”
It is a good idea to edit the name when you write
the combination.
6Adjust the stereo location in “Pan” of timbre 2.
If you want to overwrite the edited combination
onto the same combination number, press the
[REC/ WRITE] key and then press the [F8] key.
Use the cursor key [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to choose
“Pan” (highlighted) for timbre 2.
Use the VALUE controller to change the value.
The edits you make will be lost if you select
another combination or turn off the power before
saving.
A setting of C064 is center, L001 is far left, and R127
is far right. With a setting of RND, the stereo loca-
tion will change randomly between left and right
each time a note is played.
Adjusting the volume
7Adjust the “Volume” of timbre 2.
Use the cursor key [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to choose
“Volume” (highlighted) for timbre 2.
Use the VALUE controller to change the value.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling (recording a sample)
If the EXB-SMPL option (sold separately) is installed,
5In the Input1 area, set “BUS” to L/R, specifying the
bus to which the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be
input.
you will be able to record 48 kHz 16 bit stereo samples.
Sampled sounds can be used in a program, combina-
tion, or song.
Make sure that the Input1 level (“Lvl”) is 127, and
Here we will explain the process of making sampling
settings, recording the actual sample, saving it, and
converting a multisample into a program. We will also
explain how a sample such as a drum phrase can be
played back repeatedly. For other procedures and more
detailed explanations, refer to p.88 and PG p.89.
the “Pan” is L000.
Be aware that when “BUS” is changed from Off to
L/R or IFX, the volume level to the AUDIO OUT
L/ MONO and R jacks or to the headphones may
rise abruptly.
In order to perform the steps described below, the
EXB-SMPL option must be installed. (☞PG p.260)
2. Set the recording level
1Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use
for recording.
If the display indicates “ADC OVER!” (AD con-
verter input overload!), turn the rear panel [LEVEL]
knob in the direction of MIN to adjust the level
appropriately.
Sampling a sound and playing it
back as “one-shot”
For the ideal audio quality, the level should be
slightly lower than when the “ADC OVER!” dis-
play appears (i.e., the highest level that does not
produce an overload).
1. Connect a mic and make input settings
1Turn off the power. Then turn it on again.
When you turn off the power, all unsaved sample
data will be erased. If you want to keep any of the
sample data, save it before you continue.
2Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use
for recording.
The level meter will show the input volume.
This explanation assumes that you are starting
from the initial power-on state.
2Connect a mic to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack located
on the rear panel of the EXB-SMPL.
Set the AUDIO INPUT [MIC/LINE] switch to the
MIC position, and set the [LEVEL] knob to the cen-
ter.
If the display indicates “CLIP!,” use the VALUE
controller to lower the “Recording Level” slider
(located in the right of the display) from the +0.0
setting down to an appropriate level.
EXB-SMPL
3When you have finished making adjustments,
press the [REC/WRITE] key.
MIC
3. Specify the recording method (Auto)
1In the lower left of the SMPL 1.1: Recording,
Input/Pref page, select the “Auto Loop On” check
box, and press the [DEC] key to un-check it.
3Press the [SAMPLING] key to enter Sampling
mode.
2Press the [F2] (“Rec.”) key to select the SMPL 1.1:
If the EXB-SMPL option is not installed, the dis-
play will indicate “No Sampling Upgrade
Installed,” and it will not be possible to enter this
mode.
Recording, Recording page.
4Press the [F3] (“In/Pref”) key to select the SMPL
1.1: Recording, Input/Pref page.
3In REC Setup, set “Mode (REC Mode)” to “Auto,”
and set “Threshold” to –30.
With this setting, recording will begin automatically
when the audio input reaches –30 dB or higher in
record-ready mode.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set “Pre Trigger” to 5 ms.
Speak the word that you want to sample. (Exam-
ple: “It’s”)
With this setting, sample recording will begin 5 ms
earlier than (i.e., immediately before) sampling is
actually triggered, so that the very beginning of the
sound is not lost.
Recording will start when the input exceeds the
“Threshold” level.
When you finish speaking, press the [START/
STOP] key to stop sampling.
As an alternative to the Auto setting for “Mode
(REC Mode),” you can set this to Manual and
A sample has now been created. The sample you
recorded is automatically assigned to “SMPL.”
4In Sample Setup, set “Mode (Sampling Mode)” to
L-Mono.
With this setting, the internal L channel will be sam-
pled in mono.
You can listen to the sampled sound by playing the
“Orig.K” note or pressing the [AUDITION] key.
4. Create a multisample and indexes
1Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to select the SMPL
3Press the [F6] (“CREATE”) key to create a new
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
index.
Immediately after the power has been turned on,
4Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
Press the [START/STOP] key.
Speak the word that you want to sample. (Exam-
ple: “So”)
000 will be selected as the multisample “MS.”
When you finish speaking, press the [START/
STOP] key to stop sampling.
5Repeat steps 3and 4to record additional sam-
If you want to create a new multisample, use the
numeric keys to input the number of the multi-
sample that you want to create, and press the
[ENTER] key.
ples.
(Example: “Easy,” “To,” “Sample,” “With” “TR”)
6Play consecutive notes on the keyboard.
Play a chromatic scale upward, starting at the C2
key. The samples you recorded will be played one
after another.
(In this example, playing notes C2 through F#2 in
sequence will produce “It’s So Easy To Sample With
TR”)
2Set “Orig.K (Original Key)” and “TopK (Top Key)”
to C2.
When you play the key designated by “Orig.K,” the
sample will sound at the same pitch at which it was
sampled.
You can make this setting easily by holding
down the [ENTER] key and pressing the C2 key.
3Press the [F3] (“In/Pref”) key to access the SMPL
Using the insert effect while you
sample
1.1: Recording, Input/Pref page.
1In step 5of the preceding section “1. Connect a
mic and make input settings,” set the Input1 “Pan”
to C064, and “BUS” to IFX.
4Set Create “Range (Zone Range)” to 001.
When you create a new index, the width of the zone
will be set to one key.
5. Record a sample
2Press the [MENU] key to access the PAGE MENU.
1Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to access the SMPL
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
Press the [F7] (“IFX”) key, and then press the [F8]
(“Open”) key.
The SMPL 7.1: Insert Effect, Setup page will appear.
2Press the [REW/WRITE] key.
Press the [START/STOP] key to enter record-ready
mode.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Select “Insert Effect,” use the numeric keys to
enter 52, and press the [ENTER] key to confirm 52:
Rev Hall.
and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Select “IFX On/Off,” and press the [INC] key to
turn it ON.
A dialog box will appear.
4Speak into the mic, and verify that reverb is
Press the [F5] (“Name”) key to display the text dia-
log box, and assign a name of SMPL_Demo.
applied to the sound.
You can adjust the effect settings in the IFX page
([F4] key).
5After pressing the [EXIT] key, press the [F2]
(“Rec.”) key to access the SMPL 1.1: Recording,
Recording page.
Press the [F1] (“Clear”) key.
Input the first character. Use the [VALUE] dial and
the [INC]/[DEC] keys or [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] keys to
select “S”.
Input the second character. Press the [F6] key. Use
the [VALUE] dial and the [INC]/[DEC] keys or [ ],
6In Sample Setup, set “Mode (Sample Mode)” to
[
], [ ], [ ] keys to select “M”.
Stereo.
Repeat these steps to input all of the characters, and
Now the sound of the internal LR channels can be
sampled in stereo.
A stereo multisample will have a -L and -R dis-
played at the end of the name, meaning that you
will be able to input 14 characters. (The -L and -R
are fixed.) You can input 16 characters for a mono
multisample. This also applies to samples.
7Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key, and then press the
[F6] (“CREATE”) key to create a new index.
8Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
Press the [START/STOP] key, and speak the
word(s) that you want to sample.
Recording will begin according to the “Threshold”
setting.
Naming a sample
1Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to access the SMPL
Press the [START/STOP] key to stop.
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
9Play the keyboard.
2Select “Index,” and use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the sample to which you want to assign a
name.
When you play the “Orig.K” note or press the
[AUDITION] key, the sampled sound will be heard.
For this example, select “Index” 001.
Assigning a name to the sample
or multisample
The TR allows you to create up to 4,000 samples and
1,000 multisamples (limited by the amount of mem-
ory). It is a good idea to assign names so that you can
distinguish individual samples and multisamples.
It is also possible to select a sample in “SMPL,”
but since the sample assigned to each index can
change, you should use “Index” to select a sample.
3Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, use the [F7] key etc. to select “Rename
SMPL,” and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Naming a multisample
1Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to access the SMPL
When the dialog box appears, press the [F5]
(“Name”) key to access the text dialog box, and
assign the desired sample name. (Example: “It’s”)
Refer to step 3of “Naming a multisample.”
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
2Select “MS,” and use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the multisample to which you want to
assign a name.
4Select “Index,” select the next sample that you
want to name, and use the utility menu command
“Rename SMPL” to assign a name to that sample.
3Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, use the [F7] key etc. to select “Rename MS,”
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following dialog box will appear.
Saving sample data
Here’s how to save a sample or multisample that you
created.
All samples and multisamples in the TR will be
lost when the power is turned off.
4In the “To:” field, select the program into which
the data will be converted.
1Insert an SD card into the slot. Alternatively, make
sure that settings are made correctly for a con-
nected external SCSI device.
Bank D127 is initialized programs. We recommend
you select this program.
2Press the [MEDIA] key to select Media mode.
When you execute the Convert operation, the pro-
gram in the conversion destination location will be
overwritten and replaced by the converted pro-
gram.
3Press the [F2] (“Save”) key.
5Set the “Use Destination Program Parameters” set-
ting.
For this example, uncheck this. If you execute con-
version with this unchecked, the program will be
created with the sound that you heard in Sampling
mode.
4If you want to save to a different device, use the
media select setting (Media:) to select the device
on which you want to save the data.
If you want to use the program parameters of a
preloaded program, copy that program to bank
D127 before you perform this operation. Use the
“To:” field to select that program, and check “Use
Destination Program Parameters” before you per-
form the conversion.
5Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, and press the [F7] key to select “Save Sam-
pling Data.” Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to display
the following dialog box.
However if you want to convert a stereo multi-
sample with “Use Destination Program Parame-
ters” checked, you must change the “Mode
(Oscillator Mode)” to Double for the conversion
destination program (“To”) before executing the
conversion.
6Press the [F5] (“Name”) key to access the text dia-
log box, assign a filename of SMPL_DM1, and
press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
6As necessary, press the [F5] (“Name”) key to access
7Make sure that All is selected for the “To:” field,
the text dialog box and assign a program name.
and press the [F8] (“OK”) key to save the data.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key. A dialog box will ask
you for conformation. Press the [F8] (“OK”) key
once again, and the conversion will begin.
When saving is completed, a file with an extension
of .KSC together with .KMP and .KSF files in folders
will be saved. For details on each file, refer to PG
p.147 “About Korg format PCM data files.”
7Listen to the converted program.
Move to Program mode, select the program (D127),
and play the keyboard to hear the sound.
The converted program settings will automatically
be stored in internal memory, but the sample data
you created will be lost when the power is turned
off. In order to reproduce the sound of the pro-
gram after the power is turned on again, you must
first load the previously-saved sample data in
Media mode. When loading, it is best to set “.KSC
Allocation” to Clear. When saving, it is a good
idea to execute “Save All” (☞PG p.152) to save the
samples and multisamples along with the con-
verted program, and then load all of this data
together. (☞PG p.143, 147)
Converting a multisample into a
program
A multisample you created can be converted into a
program. By converting the data into a program, a
sample or multisample you created in Sampling mode
can be used in Program mode, Combination mode, or
Sequencer mode.
2Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to access the SMPL
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
3Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu.
Press the [F7] key to select “Conv.To Prog,” and
press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the recording level
Sampling and looping a drum
phrase
1Play back the audio source that you want to record.
If the display indicates “ADC OVER!” (AD con-
verter input overload!), lower the level by turning
the rear panel [LEVEL] knob to an appropriate posi-
tion. Alternatively, lower the level of the output
source.
Here’s how you can sample a drum phrase (or similar
phrase) from an audio CD, and loop the playback.
You will need to provide a drum rhythm loop sample.
Initially, it is a good idea to begin with a rhythm loop
sample that has a fairly simple beat. As an example, we
will sample one measure of a 140 BPM drum phrase in
a 4/ 4 time signature.
The best audio quality will be obtained at a level
slightly lower than when the “ADC OVER!” indi-
cation appears (i.e., the highest level that does not
cause an input overload).
2Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
1. Connect your external audio device and
make input settings
The level meter allows you to check the volume of
the input.
1Turn off the power. Then turn it on again.
When you turn off the power, all sampling data
will be erased. Be sure to save any important data
before you perform this step.
This explanation assumes that you are starting
from the default state immediately after power-on.
If the display indicates “CLIP!,” use the VALUE
controller to lower the “Recording Level” slider
(located in the right of the display) from the +0.0
position to an appropriate level.
2Connect the AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks on the rear
panel of the EXB-SMPL to the AUX OUT L and R
jacks of your CD player.
3When you have finished making adjustments,
press the [REC/WRITE] key. Also stop playback of
your audio source.
Set the AUDIO INPUT [MIC/LINE] switch to the
LINE position, and set the [LEVEL] knob near the
center.
3. Specify the recording method (Manual)
1Press the [F2] (“Rec.”) key to access the SMPL 1.1:
EXB-SMPL
Recording, Recording page.
CD player
L
AUX OUT
R
2In REC Setup, set “Mode (REC Mode)” to Manual
3Press the [SAMPLING] key to enter Sampling
to specify how recording will begin.
mode.
4Press the [F3] (“In/Pref”) key to select the SMPL
As an alternative to setting “Mode (REC Mode)”
to Manual and recording manually, you can select
Auto for automatic recording. Recording can be
1.1: Recording, Input/Pref page.
3In Sample Setup, set “Mode (Sample Mode)” to
Stereo.
With this setting, the sound of the internal LR chan-
nels can be sampled in stereo.
5Set various parameters so that the signal from the
AUDIO INPUT jacks will be input to the TR.
Make the following settings.
Input 1: “Lvl” 127, “Pan” L000, “BUS” L/R
Input 2: “Lvl” 127, “Pan” R127, “BUS” L/R
When you change the setting from Off to L/R or
IFX, the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L/
MONO and R jacks or the headphone volume may
rise abruptly. Please use caution.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Press the [F2] (“Edit2”) key to access the Edit2
4. Record the sample
page.
1Press the [F1] (“Sample”) key to access the SMPL
The waveform data of the currently selected sample
will be displayed.
1.1: Recording, Sample page.
2Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
The selected sample is a stereo sample. The L and
R waveforms will be displayed alternately when
you press the [F3] (“L/ R”) key.
3At the moment that you wish to start sampling,
press the [START/STOP] key.
Sampling will start.
4Use “S (Start)” to set the start address, “LpS (Loop
Start)” to set the loop start address, and “E (End)”
to set the end address.
It is a good idea to allow a bit of extra time before
you start and after you stop sampling.
The sample will sound as follows.
When looping is on: S → E → LpS → E → (continue
repeating LpS → E)
4At the moment that you wish to stop sampling,
press the [START/STOP] key.
Sampling will stop.
When looping is off: S → E
A 140 BPM drum phrase has now been sampled.
The sample will automatically be assigned to
“SMPL.”
Use the [ ], [ ] to select “S (Start)” (highlighted),
and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to specify the location
at which the sample will begin sounding. The verti-
cal line in the display will move accordingly.
Sampling will stop automatically if the remaining
amount of memory reaches zero.
As necessary, you can press the [F4]–[F7] keys to
expand or shrink the waveform display. Zoom will
expand/ shrink the display starting at the selected
“S (Start),” “LpS (Loop Start),” or “E (End)”
points.
If you check “Zero (Use Zero),” locations where
the waveform is at zero will automatically be
found and selected when you use the [VALUE]
dial etc. to set “S (Start),” “LpS (Loop Start),” or
“E (End)” points. This makes it easy to set these
points to addresses that will not produce clicks or
noise.
5Listen to the sampled sound, and assign a name to
the sample.
Press the C2 note or the [AUDITION] key, and the
sampled sound will play. After you have verified
(e.g., LOOP1-140 BPM). Up to 14 characters can be
input as the name of a stereo sample (the two char-
acters -L and -R at the end are fixed). When you
assign a name to either the L or R channel, the other
sample will be named automatically.
5. Make loop settings
Next we will delete unwanted portions from the sam-
ple, and make settings so that the sample will be
looped smoothly.
By default when the power is turned on, sampled
sounds will be looped automatically. (1.1: Record-
ing, Input/ Pref page “Auto Loop On” On)
For this example, set “LpS (Loop Start)” and “S
(Start)” to the same value.
If desired, you can make a dotted vertical line
appear in the sample waveform display to indicate
the BPM. If you use this function with waveforms
that have a specific BPM, it will be easier to make
accurate settings for “E (End).”
1Press the [MENU] key to access the page menu.
Press the [F3] key, and then press the [F8] (“Open”)
key to select 3.1: Loop Edit.
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, and press the [F7] key to select “Grid.”
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key. The following dialog
box will appear.
2Notice that 0000: LOOP1-140BPM -L is selected for
“SMPL.”
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check “Grid,” set “Resolution” to ꢀ , and press the
[F8] (“OK”) key. Set “ꢀ (Grid Tempo)” to 140. With
these settings, vertical dotted lines will be dis-
played at 140 BPM quarter note intervals.
Set “E (End).”
When “Lp (Loop)” is On, the dotted vertical “Grid”
lines will start at “LpS (Loop Start).” If you want to
set “End” at the end of one 4/ 4 measure, the fourth
vertical line from the “LpS (Loop Start)” line will be
the end of the first measure. Place “E (End)” at this
vertical line.
5Use “Truncate” to delete the unwanted data that is
outside of the start (or loop start) and end
addresses.
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the utility
menu, and press the [F7] key to select “Truncate.”
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key. The following dialog box
will appear.
Set “Truncate” to Front & End. In this example, we
will not change the settings of the “Save to No.” and
“Overwrite” check boxes, so press the [F8] (“OK”)
key to execute. When you execute the operation, the
truncated samples 0002: LOOP1-140B0002-L and
0003: LOOP1-140B0002-R will be automatically
assigned to Index 1.
for a cautionary note regarding the “Save to No.”
and “Overwrite” check boxes.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic functions
Saving data
•
•
Song and cue lists
Standard MIDI Files (SMF)
Types of data that can be saved
Sequencer mode songs can be saved as SMF data.
System exclusive data
System exclusive data received by the TR from an
external MIDI device (The TR can function as a data
filer.)
•
On the TR, there are three ways to save data: writing to
internal memory, saving on external media (SD card
etc.), and MIDI data dump.
•
Multisamples and sample data created in
Sampling mode (if the EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
Writing to internal memory
The following data that you edit can be written into
internal memory.
•
Program
Programs 0–127 in banks A–D
Combination
Combinations 0–127 in banks A–C
Global settings (Page 1.1–4.1)
User drum kits 00 (INT)–23 (User)
User arpeggio Patterns 000 (INT)–215 (User)
User template songs U00-U15
MIDI data dump
The following types of data can be transmitted as a
MIDI data dump and saved on an external data filer or
other device.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programs, combinations, global settings, user
drum kits, and user arpeggio patterns
Songs, cue lists
•
Song settings such as the song name and tempo,
effect settings can be saved (Write) to internal mem-
ory. However, the musical data for song tracks and
patterns are not saved to internal memory. Further-
more, settings that govern how the musical data is
played back such as “Meter,” “Metronome,” “Play/
Mute,” “Track Play Loop (including Start/ End Mea-
sure),” and RPPR settings will not be saved either.
Use the Sequencer mode Utility menu command
“Save Template Song” to write this data (☞PG p.54).
About preloaded data and preset data
Preloaded data is the data that is loaded into memory
at the factory. This data can be rewritten, and is written
into the various locations listed in the preceding sec-
tion “Writing to internal memory.” This data is main-
tained inside the TR, and can be reloaded using the
•
•
•
•
•
Program banks A–D: 000–127
Combination banks A–C: 000–127
User drum kits 00 (INT)–15 (INT)
User arpeggio patterns 000 (INT)–199 (INT)
Demo songs 000–001
Data that you edit in Sequencer or Sampling mode
(if the EXB-SMPL option is installed) cannot be
saved in internal memory by the Write operation.
Preset data is data that cannot be rewritten by the
Write operation. This includes the following data.
If the EXB-SMPL (sold separately) option is
installed, and you are using RAM bank multisam-
ples or samples as the Multisample or Drum Kit
of a program, it is not possible to write this multi-
sample or sample data (i.e., to save it perma-
nently). This means that the sound of a program or
combination that uses RAM bank multisamples or
samples will not be reproduced the next time the
power is turned on. In order to reproduce these
sounds, the saved multisamples and samples must
be loaded from external media (e.g., SD card).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Program banks G: 001–128, g(d): 001–128
Preset drum kits 64 (GM)–72 (GM)
Preset arpeggio patterns P000-P004
Preset template songs P00–P15
Preset patterns P000–P149
Program audition riffs 000–383
Saving to external media (SD card etc.)
The following data can be saved on external media (SD
card etc.). If the EXB-SMPL option is installed, this data
can also be saved on high-capacity media such as a
SCSI hard disk etc.
For details on the file format, refer to PG p.141.
•
Programs, combinations, global settings, user
drum kits, and user arpeggio patterns
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also access the same dialog box by hold-
ing down the [ENTER] key and pressing the [0]
key.
Writing to internal memory
The screen shown is for Program mode
Memory protect
To prevent programs, combinations, songs, user drum
kits, and user arpeggio patterns from being overwrit-
ten accidentally, the TR provides a Memory Protect set-
ting that prohibits writing to memory.
Before you save edited data or load data from SD card
or other external media (if the EXB-SMPL option is
installed), use the following procedure to turn off
memory protect (uncheck the appropriate check box).
2In “Category,” specify the category of the program/
combination.
If the category you specify here is for a program,
you can use it when selecting by category in the Cat.
Hold function or the Utility menu command “Select
by Category” PROG 1.1: Play, Program page (“Pro-
gram Select”) in the COMBI 1.1: Play, Prog page
(“Program Select”), the COMBI 2.1: Ed-Prog/ Mix,
Prog page, or the SEQ 1.1: Play, Program page Util-
ity menu command “Select by Category.”
You must also turn memory protect off before loading
the above data from SD card or via MIDI data dump,
or before recording in Sequencer mode.
1Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode
(the key will light), and press the [EXIT] key to
select 1.1: System.
In the case of a Combination, the category you spec-
ify here can be selected when you use the Utility
menu command “Select by Category” or the Cat.
Hold function in COMBI 1.1: Play: (“Combi Select”).
2Press the [F2] (“Pref.”) key to access the 1.1: Sys-
tem, Preferences page.
3Use “To” to specify the bank and number of the
writing destination program/combination.
Use the VALUE controller to specify the destination.
4If you wish to change the name of the program/
3Uncheck the appropriate “Memory Protect” check
box for the data that you wish to write into inter-
nal memory.
combination, press the [F5] (“Name”) key.
The text dialog box will appear. Input the name of
After you have input the name, press the [F8]
(“OK”) key to return to the Write Program/Write
Combination dialog box.
Writing a program or combination
5To execute the Write operation, press the [F8]
(“OK”) key. To cancel without executing press the
[F7] (“Cancel”) key.
The programs or combinations that you create by
using the Performance Editor or by editing parameters
in the various edit (Ed) pages can be saved in the inter-
nal memory of the this instrument. This action is
referred to as “writing a program” or “writing a combi-
nation.” If you want your edited data to be preserved
after the power is turned off, you must write it.
When you press the [F8] (“OK”) key, the display
will ask “Are you sure?” When you press the [F8]
(“OK”) key once again, the data will be written.
Using the [REC/ WRITE] key to write
This method can only be used to write to the selected
program/ combination number.
There are two ways to write a program or combination.
Before you write data into memory, you must turn
off the memory protect setting in Global mode.
1Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
The following dialog box will appear.
The screen shown is for Program mode
A combination does not contain the actual pro-
gram data for each timbre, but simply remembers
the number of the program used by each timbre. If
you edit a program that is used by a combination,
or exchange it with a different program number,
the sound of the combination will also change.
2To write the data, press the [F8] (“OK”) key. To
cancel without writing, press the [F7] (“Cancel”)
key.
Using a Utility menu command to write
1Select the Utility menu command “Write Program”
or “Write Combination.”
The Write Program/ Write Combination dialog box
will appear.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The function buttons will have the following functions.
Clear: Erase all text.
Assigning a name (Rename)
Del (Delete): Delete the character at the cursor loca-
tion.
You can modify the name of an edited program, combi-
nation, song, drum kit, user arpeggio patterns etc..
Ins (Insert): Insert a space at the cursor location.
Cap. (Capital): Switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters.
: Move the cursor to the left.
: Move the cursor to the right.
You can also modify the category names for programs
and combinations.
These renaming operations can be performed in the
following pages.
Programs
PROG 1.1...7.2 Utility:Write Program
COMBI 1.1...7.2 Utility:Write Combination
SEQ 1.1...4.4, 6.1 Utility: Rename Song
SEQ 2.1 Utility: Rename Cue List
SEQ 5.1, 5.2 Utility: Rename Track
SEQ 5.1 Utility: Rename Pattern
The following input operations can also be
performed.
“0”–“9,” “–,” and “.” can be input using the numeric
keys. When you input these, the cursor will advance
automatically.
Combinations
Song
Cue list
Tracks
By pressing the [ENTER] key at the space (blank),
you can input the selected text before the space.
Patterns
Multisamples*
Samples*
SMPL 1.1...4.1, 5.2 Utility: Rename MS
SMPL 1.1...4.1, 5.2 Utility: Rename SMPL
GLOBAL 5.1 Utility: Rename Drum Kit
GLOBAL 6.1 Utility: Rename Arpeggio Pattern
GLOBAL 4.1:TEXT
Drum kits
About the Edit Buffer
User arpeggio patterns
Program categories
Combination categories
File
When you select a program or combination in PROG
1.1: Play and COMBI 1.1: Play, the program or combi-
nation data is called into the “edit buffer.”
When you modify the parameters in 1.1: Play or in the
Edit pages 2.1–7.2 of Program mode or Combination
mode, the changes you make will affect the data in the
edit buffer.
GLOBAL 4.1:TEXT
MEDIA, Save Utility: Save All...Save Exclusive
*: If the EXB-SMPL option is installed
1Open the text dialog box.
If you wish to save this modified data into internal
memory, you must perform the Write operation.
When you perform the Write operation, the data in the
edit buffer is written to the specified program number
or combination number of the specified bank.
If you select another program or combination without
writing, the data of the newly selected program or
combination will be called into the edit buffer, and
your changes will be lost.
Refer to the above table for the relevant page.
In the Utility menu commands, press “Name” (the
[F5] key) in the dialog box that appears.
In GLOBAL 4.1, select “TEXT” (press the [F5] key).
When you press the [COMPARE] key in Program
mode or Combination mode, the data from mem-
ory (i.e., the contents that were written into mem-
ory) will be temporarily called into the edit buffer.
This allows you to compare the settings you are
editing with the original un-edited settings.
For example if you wish to input the text shown in
the screen shown above, you would use the follow-
ing procedure.
2Press the [F1] (“Clear”) key.
All text of the text box will be erased.
3Input “A”
Editing applies to the data in the edit
buffer. Programs or combinations will
play according to the data in the edit
buffer.
Use the [VALUE] dial, the [INC]/ [DEC] keys, or
cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select “A.”
Press the [ENTER] key or [F6] (“ ”) key. The cursor
will move.
Edit
Edit Buffer
When you write, the program or
combination settings will be
saved in internal memory.
When you select a program or
combination, its data is called from
internal memory into the edit buffer.
4Input “.”
Write
Select
Use the [VALUE] dial, the [INC]/ [DEC] keys, or
cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to select “.”
Press the [ENTER] key or [F6] (“ ”) key. The cursor
will move.
Internal Memory
Program
Bank A 0...127
Combination
Bank A 0...127
Repeat this step to input all the characters.
5Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
If you selected “Name” in the dialog box of step 1
to access the text dialog box, you will return to the
previous dialog box. Press the [F8] (“OK”) key in
that dialog box to execute the Rename operation.
If you selected “TEXT” in step 1to access the text
dialog box, the Rename operation will be executed.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the [REC/ WRITE] key to write
Writing global settings, user drum kits,
and user arpeggio patterns
1In the following pages, press the [REC/WRITE]
key. A dialog box will appear.
Global settings:
User drum kits:
User arpeggio patterns:
GLOBAL 1.1–4.1
GLOBAL 5.1
GLOBAL 6.1
The settings you edit in Global mode can be written
into internal memory. This is done using the operations
Write Global Setting, Write User Drum Kits, and
Write User Arpeggio Patterns. If you wish to use these
settings after turning the power off, be sure to write the
data.
The example shown is for Update Arpeggio Patterns
There are two ways to write global settings, user drum
kits, and user arpeggio patterns.
Before you write a user drum kit or user arpeggio
pattern, the Global mode memory protect setting
2To execute the Write operation, press the [F8]
(“OK”) key. To cancel, press the [F7] (“Cancel”)
key.
The user arpeggio pattern settings “Tempo,” “Pat-
tern,” “Octave,” “Resolution,” “Sort,” “Latch,”
“Key Sync,” and “Keyboard” are parameters that
are set independently in Program, Combination,
and Song. These settings are not saved when you
perform the Write operation described here.
If you moved from Program or Combination mode
and set these parameters, you must return to the
original mode and write them.
Memory in Global mode
When the power is turned on, the Global mode data is
called from internal memory into the Global mode
memory area. Then when you modify the parameters
in Global mode, the data in the memory area will be
modified. If you wish to save this modified data in
internal memory, you must Write it.
When you write, the data in the memory area will be
written into the global settings, drum kits, and arpeg-
gio patterns of internal memory.
If you turn off the power without writing, the modified
data in the memory area will be lost.
Using a Utility menu command to write
1To write global settings (the various settings in
GLOBAL 1.1–4.1), select the Utility “Write Global
Setting” in GLOBAL 1.1–4.1, and press the [F8]
(“OK”) key.
Editing will affect the data that has
been called into the memory area.
The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear.
Edit
Memory Area
When you write, the various
Global mode settings will
be saved in internal
memory.
When the power is turned
on, the settings are called
into the memory area.
Write
Power On
To write user drum kits, select the Utility “Write
Drum Kits” in GLOBAL 5.1, and press the [F8]
(“OK”) key.
Internal Memory
Drum Kit
Arpeggio
Pattern
Global Setting
The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear.
To write user arpeggio patterns, select the Utility
“Write Arpeggio Patterns” in GLOBAL 6.1, and
press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
The Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box will appear.
The example shown is for Write Arpeggio Patterns
The same dialog box will also appear if, in each of
the above pages, you hold down the [ENTER] key
and press the [0] key.
2To execute the Write operation, press the [F8]
(“OK”) key. To cancel, press the [F7] (“Cancel”)
key.
When you press the [F8] (“OK”) key, the display
will ask “Are you sure?” Press the [F8] (“OK”) key
once again to write the data.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the Utility
menu. Press the [F7] key to select “Save All,” and
then press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Saving on external media
A dialog box will appear. The contents, settings, and
operations for the dialog box will depend on the
type of data that you are saving. For details refer to
PG p.152.
For details on the data that can be saved on external
Song data and cue lists in the TR’s Sequencer
mode, and multisamples and samples in Sampling
mode (if the EXB-SMPL option is installed) cannot
be written into internal memory. This data will dis-
appear when the power is turned off. If you wish
to keep this data, you must save it on an SD card
or on other external SCSI storage media.
6Press the [F5] (“Name”) key to display the text dia-
Other types of data can also be saved on an SD
card, or (if the EXB-SMPL option is installed) on
external SCSI storage media (maximum 4 GB), and
loaded to restore the original settings even if they
have been modified. It is a good idea to save favor-
ite settings that you create.
7Use the check boxes to uncheck items that you do
not want to save.
In order to accurately reproduce the data you cre-
ated, we recommend that you check all of the boxes.
8Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to execute the Save oper-
As an example, we will explain how to save the
following data.
ation.
The data will be saved to the SD card, and you will
return to the Save page.
The time required to save the information will
depend on the amount of data.
•
Internal memory programs, combinations, global
settings, user drum kits, user arpeggio patterns
Songs, cue lists
Multisamples and samples created in Sampling
mode (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
•
•
If the SD card contains an identically-named file,
you will be asked whether you want to Overwrite.
If you want to overwrite, press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
If you want to save without overwriting, press the
[F7] (“Cancel”) key, repeat the procedure from step
5, rename the data in step 6, and then save it.
If you save this data to SD card, you may need to
use more than one SD card.
1Insert an SD card into the SD card slot.
For details on handling the SD card, please be sure
to read “Caution when handling an SD card”
If the EXB-SMPL option is installed, and you want
to save data on external SCSI media such as a hard
disk, refer to the manual included with the EXB-
SMPL and make sure that the external SCSI device
is connected correctly.
If when saving a .KSC file, the save destination
media already contains a directory with the same
name as the .KSC file you are attempting to save, a
message of “File already exists” will be displayed,
and it will not be possible to execute the Save
operation.
If this occurs, you can either change the name of
the .KSC file you are saving, change the name of
the directory on the media, or delete the directory
from the media before executing the Save opera-
tion.
You will also need to format the media if necessary.
(☞PG p.156)
2Press the [MEDIA] key to enter Media mode.
9When the data has been saved and you return to
the Save page, the LCD screen will show the file
that has been saved.
3Press the [F2] (“Save”) key to access the Save page.
4If the media contains directories, select the direc-
tory in which you want to save the data.
The data will be saved as the following files.
To move to a lower level, press the [F6] (“OPEN”)
key. To move to a higher level, press the [F5] (“UP”)
key.
.PCG file
Programs, combinations, drum kits, user arpeggio
patterns, and global settings that were saved in
internal memory
5Select the Utility menu command “Save All.”
.SNG file
Sequencer songs and cue lists
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.KSC file
Files listing the multisamples and samples created
in Sampling mode (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed).
MIDI data dump
The programs (A-D), combinations (A–C), drum kits,
user arpeggio patterns and global settings of internal
memory, and sequencer songs, cue lists, can be trans-
mitted as MIDI exclusive data and saved on a con-
nected MIDI data filer, computer, or another TR. (☞PG
p.131)
Directory
A directory containing the multisamples (.KMP
files) and samples (.KSF files) that are listed in the
.KSC file
Other ways to save
In addition to “Save All,” the page menu commands
include a “Save PCG” command which saves program,
combination, drum kit, user arpeggio pattern, and glo-
bal setting data, a “Save SEQ” command which saves
only the sequencer song and cue list data, and a “Save
Sampling Data” command which saves only the multi-
samples and samples of Sampling mode (if the EXB-
SMPL option is installed). Select the page menu com-
mand that is appropriate for the data you want to save
to external media.
When using “Save All,” “Save PCG & SEQ,” and
“Save PCG” to save combinations, you should also
remember to save the programs used by each tim-
bre (and the drum kits used by the programs) and
user arpeggio patterns at the same time.
Similarly when saving programs, you should also
remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio
patterns used by the programs.
If your programs or drum kits use multisamples
and samples that were created in Sampling mode
(using the EXB-SMPL option), we recommend that
you use “Save All” to save the data.
When you use “Save PCG” or “Save Sampling
Data” to individually save a program or drum kit,
or a multisample or sample that you created in
Sampling mode (using the EXB-SMPL option), we
recommend that you save them under the same
filename in the same directory. When you use
“Load PCG” to load a .PCG file, the identically-
named .KSC file will also be loaded so that the cor-
rect multisamples/ samples will correspond auto-
matically.
When saving .KSC, .KMP, and .KSF files and the
data does not fit on a single SD card (or other vol-
ume of media), another dialog box will appear,
and you will be asked to specify the next volume
of media (☞PG p.152 “If the data does not fit on
the media when saving”)
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoring the factory settings
If the Memory Protected dialog box appears, un-
check the memory protect setting, and perform the
Loading the preloaded data
The factory settings are referred to as the “preloaded
data.” The action of restoring the programs, combina-
tions, and global settings of the TR to their factory set-
tings is referred to as “loading the preloaded data.”
Loading individual banks or data items
The TR allows you to load individual banks, programs,
or combinations. Drum kits and arpeggio patterns can
also be loaded individually or as a group.
This operation will rewrite any data that had been
previously written. If you do not want to lose the
previously-written data, you must first save it to
SD card or external SCSI media (requires the EXB-
This is convenient when you want to restore just one
item of factory-set data, or when you want to rearrange
combinations in a specific order for live performance.
1Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode.
It is of course also possible to rearrange programs,
but you should be aware that this may change the
(The key will light.)
2Press the [EXIT] key.
As an example, here’s how to load the combination
B015: Rock Organ into C064: Modern Piano.
You will be in the Global mode 1.1: System page.
1Perform steps 1–4described above to access the
dialog box.
3Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the Utility
menu.
2Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to set “Kind” to Combi-
nation.
3Press the [ ] key to move downward, and use the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to select Single.
4Press the [F7] (“
”) key to select “Load Pre-
4Press the [ ] key to move downward, and use the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to select the combination B015:
Rock Organ as the copy source.
load/Demo Data,” and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
A dialog box will appear.
5Press the [ ] key to move downward, and use the
[INC]/[DEC] keys to select the combination C064:
Modern Piano as the load destination (“To”).
6Press the [F8] (“OK”) key twice.
The data will be loaded, and C064 will be the Rock
Organ combination.
5Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the data that
you want to load.
Use “Kind” to select the data that you want to load.
For this example, select All Preload PCG.
.PCG files contain program, combination, drum kit,
arpeggio pattern, and global setting data.
6Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
A dialog box will ask you for confirmation.
7Once again press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
All the preloaded data will be loaded.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program mode
In Program mode you can select, play and edit pro-
grams.
How a program is organized
Program mode consists of pages 1.1: Play–7.2: Ed–Mas-
terFX.
In 1.1: Play; you can select and play programs. You can
also edit the sound in simple ways, and make arpeg-
A program consists of the many parameters of 2.1: Ed–
Basic–7.2: Ed–MasterFX. The diagram below shows the
structure of a program.
In 2.1: Ed–Basic–7.2: Ed–MasterFX, you can edit the
parameters of the program that was selected in 1.1:
Play.
Basic program editing
When shipped from the factory, the TR contains
numerous preloaded programs. You can edit these pre-
loaded programs to create your own original pro-
grams. You can also create original programs using
your own sampled waveforms or multisamples that
you sampled in Sampling mode (using the EXB-SMPL
option) or loaded into internal memory in Media
mode.
With the factory settings, this instrument’s program
bunks A, B, C and D contain preloaded programs. You
can edit these programs to create your own original
programs.
For parameters in 2.1: Ed–Basic–5.3: Ed–LFOs that
are set independently for each oscillator 1 and 2,
you can use the Utility “Copy Oscillator” to copy
settings from one oscillator to the other. This is a
convenient way to make the same settings for two
oscillators, or to copy settings from one oscillator
to the other.
If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed, the TR will have AUDIO INPUT jacks
that allow external audio to be input. In Sampling
mode you can sample these external audio input
sources. In modes other than Sampling mode, the
TR’s internal effects can be applied to the external
audio input sources, allowing a wide range of
If you wish to save an edited program into internal
In this section we will give examples of how to modify
representative parameters in each page. For details on
all parameters, refer to in the PG p.1–.
All transmission and reception of MIDI data in
Program mode is performed on the Global MIDI
channel. The global MIDI channel is set in GLO-
BAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Channel.”
Programs you edit or create can be written into the 512
program memory areas of banks A–D. They can also be
saved and managed on SD card in Media mode
Program Basic : 2.1-1
Controller Setup:
2.2
Arpeggiator :
6.1
OSC1 LFO1 : 5.3-1
OSC1 LFO2 : 5.3-2
Master Effect 1, 2:
Insert Effect :
7.2-1...3
7.1-1
OSC1 Basic : 2.1-2, 4
Filter1(A/B) : 4.1-1
Amp1 Level/Pan : 5.1-1
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Insert Effect:
7.1-2, 3
MasterEQ : 7.2-4
OSC1, 2
OSC1 Pitch Mod. : 3.1-1, 2
Filter1 Mod. : 4.1-2,3
Filter1 LFO Mod. : 4.1-4
Amp1 Mod. : 5.1-2
Insert Effect
Master Effect
Individual-
Output
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1,2
Amp1 EG : 5.1-3
Filter1 EG : 4.1-5
OSC 1
OSC 2
Pitch EG : 3.1-5
Filter
Effect
1.1-1 and 2.1-2 etc. indicate the page tab screens used when editing on this instrument.
Oscillator / Pitch
Amplifier
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic (Prog Basic) page
The three elements of sound
Sound can be broken down into three elements: pitch,
tone, and volume.
On this instrument, these elements correspond to the
Pitch, Filter, and Amplifier settings of the program. In
other words you would adjust the Pitch settings to
modify the pitch, the Filter settings to modify the tone,
and the Amplifier settings to modify the volume.
In Oscillator (Oscillator: 2.1: Ed-Basic settings) you
select the waveform multisample that determines the
basic sound, and specify its pitch. This sound is then
modified by the pitch settings (Pitch: 3.1: Ed-Pitch), fil-
ter settings (Filter: 4.1, 4.2: Ed-Filter), and amp settings
(Amplifier: 5.1, 5.2: Ed-Amp) to create the basic sound
of the program.
Mode (Oscillator Mode)
This sets the mode of the oscillator.
Single uses one oscillator and Double uses two oscilla-
tors. In the case of Single the maximum polyphony is
62 notes, and in the case of Double the maximum
polyphony is 31 notes. If you wish to use a Drum Kit to
This basic sound can then be modified further by using
insert effect (7.1: Ed-InsertFX settings), master effects,
and master EQ (7.2: Ed-MasterFX settings) to apply
finishing touches. When arpeggiator settings (6.1: Ed-
Arp.) and controller settings (2.2: Ed-Ctrl) are added to
this, the final result is called a “program.”
Mode (Voice Assign Mode)
Indicates whether the program will sound in Poly
(polyphonically) or Mono (monophonically).
If this is set to Poly, you will be able to play chords
using the program. If this is set to Mono, only one note
will sound even if you play a chord. Normally you will
set this to Poly, but it is effective to use Mono when
you are playing sounds such as analog-synth bass or
synth lead. Try switching between Poly and Mono,
and listen to the result.
Programs that are used in Combination mode or
Sequencer mode have insert effect, master effect,
master EQ, arpeggiator, and controller settings
that are separate from those of Program mode.
OSC1 page, OSC2 page
The Compare function
As you are editing a program, you can use the [COM-
PARE] key to listen to the previously saved version of
the sound, (as it was before you began editing). Press
the [COMPARE] key (the key light comes on) to hear
the original version. Pressing [COMPARE] again (the
light goes dark) returns you to the version you are edit-
ing.
Specifies the multisample for oscillator 1, 2.
Selecting a multisample
The multisample will determine the basic character of
the program.
If you edit while the [COMPARE] key is lit, the key
will go dark. That sound will be the sound that is
recalled when the [COMPARE] key is dark.
Use “High MS Bank” to select the multisample
bank, and use “High Multisample” to select the
multisample.
If the “High MS Bank” is ROM or EX, you can
select preset multisamples. “High Multisample”
can be selected from a range of ROM: 000–424, EX:
000–044. (☞VNL)
If “High MS Bank” is RAM, you can select multi-
samples that were created in Sampling mode or
loaded in Media mode (if the EXB-SMPL option and
sample data RAM is installed). In “High Multisam-
ple” you can select from 000–999.
Oscillator settings
2.1: Ed–Basic
In 2.1: Ed–Basic you can make oscillator-related set-
tings. This instrument provides two oscillators, and for
each oscillator you can select a basic waveform (“mul-
tisample”) and set the pitch. The multisamples pro-
vided by this instrument include waveforms for
musical instruments such as pianos, as well as special
waveforms unique to synthesizers. Multisamples
reproduce the complex overtone structure and fre-
quency characteristics that allow us to identify a sound
as being “piano-like” or “guitar-like.”
You can use the Utility “Select by Category” to
select internal preset multisamples from 15 catego-
ries. (☞PG p.8)
High Multisample and Low Multisample
If you specify a High and Low multisample for an
oscillator, either the High or the Low multisample will
sound depending on the velocity of the note (i.e., the
strength at which you play the keyboard). This func-
tion is called velocity multisample switching.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Specify different multisamples for “High Multi-
(You can create programs using multisamples/ sam-
ples that were sampled in Sampling mode or loaded
in Media mode.)
sample” and “Low Multisample.”
2Specify a velocity value for “Velocity SW L→H.”
•
•
Nine internal drum kits (ROM)
Notes played on the keyboard at a velocity less than
the value you specify will sound the Low multisam-
ple; velocities at or above this velocity value will
sound the High multisample.
For example if you set “Velocity SW L→H” to 100,
playing the keyboard softly will sound the “Low”
multisample, and playing strongly will sound the
“High” multisample.
24 user drum kits created in Global mode
(Drum samples can be freely assigned to each key to
create a drum kit. For the sound of each key, you can
make filter and amp settings, and specify routing to
the effects and to the individual audio outputs.)
V.Zone (Velocity Zone) page
3Adjust the “Level” for High and Low multisam-
ples to set their volume balance.
If you do not wish to use this function, set the
“Velocity SW L → H” value to 001. Only the High
multisample will sound.
Here you can specify the range of velocities that will
sound oscillators 1 and 2. In the example shown above,
the velocity ranges are as follows.
Rev (Reverse) check box
If this is checked, the multisample will be played back-
ward. This can produce interesting results when used
on sound-effects, etc. Normally you will not check this.
•
•
OSC1 will sound for all velocity values.
OSC2 will sound only for strongly played notes (64
and above).
•
You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in
addition to this (☞“High Multisample, Low
Multisample”). For this example, set “OSC1” in
“Velocity SW L→H” to 32 and “OSC2” to 96. The
settings are shown as vertical lines in the velocity
zone display.
When “Oscillator Mode” = Double
To use OSC2, set “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” to Double
in the Basic (Prog Basic) page.
In the same way as for OSC1, you can set High and
Low multisamples for OSC2.
The playback pitch can be set independently. By using
the same multisample with slightly different “Tune”
settings, you can “detune” the oscillators to produce a
richer sound.
In this example, the multisamples will sound over
four levels.
Velocity values 001–031:
sound only the OSC1 Low multisample.
Velocity values 032–063:
sound only the OSC1 High multisample.
Velocity values 064–095:
It will be convenient to use the Utility “Copy
Oscillator” to make the oscillator settings match
each other.
sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2
Low multisample.
Velocity values 096–127:
sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2
High multisample.
When “Oscillator Mode” = Drums
Controller settings
2.2: Ed–Ctrl
Ctrls (Controls) page
In the Basic (Prog Basic) page, set “Mode (Oscillator
Mode)” to Drums. When this is set to Drums, you will
be able to create a drum program.
This will select a drum kit instead of a multisample.
This instrument provides sixteen factory preset drum
kits that are suitable for a wide variety of music.
(☞Drumkit name, VNL)
For each program, this tab lets you make settings for
the [SW1] and [SW2,] and for the B-mode of REAL-
225)
Here you can only select a drum kit. To edit or create a
Pitch settings
3.1: Ed–Pitch
Here you can specify how the pitch of the multisample
selected for the oscillator will change. Pitch EG and
LFO settings allow the pitch to varied over time.
The following multisamples or drum kits can be used
for the oscillator.
The parameters of the OSC2 page and OSC2lfo page
are valid only if “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” is set to
Double.
•
•
470 internal preset multisamples (ROM, EX)
Multisamples (RAM) created in Sampling mode (if
the EXB-SMPL option is installed)
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Intensity (AMS Intensity)” specifies the depth of
vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when AMS
(Alternate Modulation Source) is operated. For exam-
ple if “AMS (LFO1 AMS)” is set to AfterT and you set
an appropriate value for “Intensity (AMS Intensity),”
vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the
keyboard or when MIDI aftertouch messages are
received.
OSC1 page
Pitch
EG (Pitch EG) page
Here you can make settings for the pitch EG.
The “JS (–X)” and “JS(+X)” settings specify the
amount of pitch change (in semitones) that will occur
when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when
the joystick is moved to left or right. A setting of +12
allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one
octave upward; a setting of –12 allows the pitch to be
controlled a maximum of one octave downward.
When you wish to create sound effects etc., set the
pitch EG to make major changes in pitch over time.
To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that
occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a
brass or vocal sound, you can use the EG to create a
subtle change in pitch at the attack (☞PG p.10).
“Ribbon (#16)” specifies the amount of pitch change
(in semitones) that will occur when MIDI control
change (CC) #16 messages are received or when the
ribbon controller of a TRITON or other MIDI-con-
nected instrument is moved to left or right. With a set-
ting of +12, the pitch will rise one octave at the far right
of the ribbon controller, and fall one octave downward
at the far left of the ribbon controller.
EG and LFO
By using an EG (envelope generator) to apply time-
varying change or by using an LFO (Low Frequency
Oscillator) to apply cyclic change to pitch, filter, or
amp, you can create changes in the pitch, tone, or vol-
ume.
Pitch EG
EG (Envelope Generator)
When the “Intensity” value is set to +12.00, the pitch
EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maxi-
mum of ±1 octave of pitch change.
This instrument provides a Pitch EG, Filter EG, and
Amplifier EG, which produce time-varying changes in
pitch, tone, and volume respectively.
note-on
Attack Level
note-off
Break Level
Portamento
Level
If “Enable” is checked, portamento will be applied.
Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when
you play the next note before releasing the previous
note.
Release Level
Time
Sustain Level
The “Time” parameter specifies the portamento time.
As this value is increased, the pitch will change over a
longer time. With a value of 000, there will be no porta-
mento.
Release Time
Slope Time
Decay Time
Attack Time
Start Level
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
If Porta.SW (CC#65) is assigned as the function of
[SW1] or [SW2] key, the portamento effect can be
switched on/ off by [SW1] or [SW2] key.
For each oscillator, this instrument provides two LFO’s
that can be used to apply cyclical change in pitch, tone,
and volume.
Examples of this are vibrato (cyclical change in pitch),
wah (cyclical change in tone), and tremolo or auto-pan
(cyclical change in volume).
OS1lfo (OSC1 LFO) page
Filter settings
4.1: Ed–Filter1, 4.2: Ed–Filter2
LFO 1/ 2
The filter allows you to diminish or emphasize speci-
fied frequency areas of the multisample selected for the
oscillator. The tone of the sound will depend signifi-
cantly on the filter settings.
This instrument provides Filter 1 for OSC1 and Filter 2
for OSC2. For each of these filters, you can select from
two types (Low Pass Resonance or Low Pass & High
Pass). Filter 2 can be used if “Mode (Oscillator Mode)”
is set to Double.
An LFO can be used to cyclically modulate the pitch
(the “vibrato” effect).
“Intensity (LFO Intensity)” sets the depth to which the
LFO specified in 5.3: Ed-LFOs will affect the pitch.
With a setting of +12.00, vibrato will produce a maxi-
mum of ±1 octave of pitch change.
“JS+Y Int” specifies the amount of vibrato that the
LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away
from yourself.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filter characteristics
When resonance is applied
This area of
Level
Level
overtones will
be diminished
Low Pass
Level
Filte r
Overtones included
Overtones after
passing through
the filter
in the original multisample
Frequency (pitch)
Frequency (pitch)
Low resonance value
High resonance value
Basic page
Mod.1, Mod.2 page
Filter Type, Filter A, Filter B
Selects the type of filter, and specify the “Frequency”
(cutoff frequency) and “Resonance” (resonance level).
•
Low Pass Resonance (24 dB/ oct low pass filter
with resonance): Make settings for filter A.
Low Pass & High Pass (12 dB/ oct low pass filter
and 12 dB/ oct high pass filter in series connection):
Make low pass filter settings in filter A, and high
pass filter settings in filter B.
Controllers and the filter EG can be used to modulate
the filter cutoff frequency that was specified in the
Basic page. By using a controller to vary the tone or by
using an EG to create time-varying changes, you can
add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound.
•
Keyboard Track (Mod.1 page)
This varies the cutoff frequency according to the posi-
tion of the key on the keyboard that you play.
Low pass filter
This is the most common type of filter, which passes
the low frequency range and cuts the high frequency
range. When the overtones of the high range are cut, a
bright sound will become darker (more mellow).
24 dB/ oct and 12 dB/ oct refer to the steepness of the
cut. 24 dB/ oct means that the gain will decrease 24 dB
in one octave (i.e., as the frequency doubles). A 12 dB/
oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in one octave.
The 24 dB/ oct filter produces a steeper cut.
•
•
•
When Ramp “Low” is set to a positive (+) value,
the cutoff frequency will rise as you play lower on
the keyboard, making the sound brighter. When set
to a negative (–) value, the cutoff frequency will fall
as you play lower on the keyboard, making the
sound darker.
When Ramp “High” is set to a positive (+) value,
the cutoff frequency will rise as you play higher on
the keyboard, making the sound brighter. When set
to a negative (–) value, the cutoff frequency will fall
as you play higher on the keyboard, making the
sound darker.
Low Pass
Level
12dB/oct
24dB/oct
Int. “to A” and “to B” adjust the effect that
keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B
(☞PG p.14).
Frequency
Filter EG (Mod.1 page)
High pass filter
Adjusts the effect produced by the filter EG, whose set-
tings are made in the EG page.
This type of filter passes the high frequency range and
cuts the low frequency range. Use this when you wish
to make the sound thinner. However if the cutoff fre-
quency (Frequency) is raised excessively high, the vol-
ume will become very low.
•
•
•
Use the Int. “to A” and “to B” settings to specify
the depth of the filter EG.
Use the Vel “to A” and “to B” settings to specify
the effect of velocity on the filter EG.
“AMS” and “Int to A, B” adjust the effect that AMS
will have on the filter EG depth.
High Pass
Level
12dB/oct
These three settings will determine the depth of the
tonal change produced by the filter EG.
Frequency
Filter Modulation (Mod.2 page)
Set this when you wish to produce tonal change by
using controllers etc. to vary the cutoff frequency.
Resonance
When “Resonance” is set to a higher value, the over-
tones in the region of the cutoff frequency will be
boosted as shown in the diagram below, giving a dis-
tinctive character to the sound.
lfoMod (LFO Mod.) page
Indicates settings that allow the LFO to produce cyclic
changes in tone (a “wah” effect).
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intensity: “to A (LFO1 Int. to A)” and “to B (LFO1 Int. to
B)” specify by how much the LFO will change the tone.
JS-Y Int.: “to A” and “to B” specify the depth of the
wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when the
joystick of this instrument is moved toward yourself,
or when CC#2 is received.
Lvl/ Pan (Level/ Pan) page
“Int. to A” and “Int. to B” specify the depth of the wah
effect that will be produced by the LFO when “AMS”
(Alternate Modulation Source) is operated. For exam-
ple if “AMS” is set to AfterT, applying pressure to the
keyboard of the TR, will apply a wah effect.
Amp1 Level, Amp2 Level
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed
through the oscillator, filter, and amp.
EG page
Pan
Indicates settings for the filter EG, which controls time-
variant changes in tone (☞PG p.16). Make settings for
the EG here, and set the depth of its effect in the Mod.1
page “Filter EG” parameter.
Specifies the pan (stereo position) after the signal has
passed through the oscillator, filter, and amp. Nor-
mally you will set this to C064. If “Mode (Oscillator
Mode)” is Double and you wish to create a sense of
stereo, set the 5.1: Ed-Amp1 and 5.2: Ed-Amp2 param-
eter “Pan” to left and right for oscillators 1 and 2
respectively. With a setting of Random, the pan will
change randomly each time you play a note on this
instrument, producing an interesting effect.
Filter EG and Amplifier EG
When the Filter EG changes the cutoff frequency, the
tone will change. However depending on the volume
changes produced by the Amplifier EG, this can be
heard in different ways. For example by changing the
speed at which the tone and volume begin (attack) or
decay, you can significantly vary the character of the
tonal change. It is a good idea to adjust the changes of
both the Filter EG (tone) and the Amplifier EG (vol-
ume) as you proceed with editing. (☞“5.1: Ed–Amp1,
EG page, 5.2: Ed–Amp2, EG page)
AMS Intensity
“Intensity” specifies the depth of the panning effect
that will occur when “AMS” is operated.
If you set “AMS” to Note No., the pan will change
according to the keyboard position at which you play a
note on a this instrument. With a setting of LFO1 or 2,
the pan will sweep from side to side (auto pan). Other
settings allow you to move the oscillator pan by oper-
ating a controller.
Use DKit Setting
Amplifier settings
This is valid when “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” is set to
Drums. If this is checked, the pan location specified by
the Drum Kit for each drum sound will be used. If this
is unchecked, all drum sounds will sound at the same
location. Preload and GM drum kits are set to stereo
settings. Normally you will leave this checked.
5.1: Ed–Amp1, 5.2: Ed–Amp2
These settings affect the volume. Here you can adjust
the way in which the Amp EG and LFO produce time-
varying and cyclic changes in volume, and how the
controllers etc. will affect the volume.
Amp1 applies to OSC1, and Amp2 applies to OSC2.
Amp2 can be used if “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” is set
to Double.
Mod. page
For example, the volume of a piano note begins at a
high volume the instant you play the note, and then
decreases gradually. The volume of an organ note
remains constant as long as you continue pressing the
key. The volume of a note on a violin or wind instru-
ment can be varied during the note by the musician
(i.e., by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow
or the force of the breath).
Keyboard Track
This lets you vary the volume relative to the position of
the key you are playing on the keyboard.
Piano
Organ
Volume remains constant
until note is released
Volume
Volume
Volume decays gradually
•
When Ramp “Low” has a positive (+) value, the
volume will increase as you play lower on the
keyboard. With a negative (–) value, the volume
will decrease as you play lower on the keyboard.
When Ramp “High” has a positive (+) value, the
volume will increase as you play higher on the
keyboard. With a negative (–) value, the volume
will decrease as you play higher on the keyboard.
Time
Time
•
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Amp Mod.
OSC1 LFO1, OSC1 LFO2, OSC2 LFO1, OSC2 LFO2
“Velocity Int” is used by most programs to decrease
the volume of softly played notes and increase the vol-
ume of strongly played notes, and this Amp Modula-
tion parameter adjusts the depth of this control.
Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive (+)
values. As this setting is increased, there will be greater
volume difference between softly played and strongly
played notes.
“Waveform” selects the type of LFO. You can choose
from a variety of waveforms, including standard
waveforms such as Triangle, Saw, Square, and Sine,
as well as Step or Random PG waveforms that pro-
duce a sample-and-hold effect (☞PG p.22).
You can create a wide variety of effects by adjusting the
“Ofs,” “Fade,” and “Dly” settings, and by changing
the sign (+/ –) of the “Intensity” setting in the 3.1: Ed-
Pitch, 4.1: Ed-Filter1, 4.2: Ed-Filter2, 5.1: Ed-Amp1, and
5.2: Ed-Amp2 pages. “Frequency” specifies the speed
of the LFO.
LFO1 Mod., LFO2 Mod.
Specify how the LFO’s will produce cyclic changes in
volume (the tremolo effect).
Freq.Mod (Frequency Modulation)
The volume will be affected by the LFO(s) for which
you set an “Intensity (LFO1 Intensity, LFO2 Intensity)”
value.
“Int (AMS Intensity)” adjusts the depth by which the
tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected
when you operate an “AMS (LFO1 AMS, LFO2
AMS).”
For example if you set “AMS” to JS-Y #02, tremolo will
be applied when you move the joystick of this instru-
ment. toward yourself, or when CC#02 is received.
“AMS” can be used to vary the LFO speed. This lets
you change the LFO speed by operating a controller, or
by the EG or Keyboard Track settings.
MIDI/ Tempo Sync.
If “MIDI/Tempo Sync” is checked, the “Frequency”
setting will be ignored, and the LFO will synchronize
to the tempo of the sequencer and arpeggiator. This
lets you produce vibrato, wah, auto-pan, or tremolo
that is synchronized to the playback speed of the
sequencer or arpeggiator.
EG page
Here you can make settings for the amp EG, which
changes the volume over time.
Every instrument has its own characteristic curve of
volume change. This is part of what gives each instru-
ment its identifiable character. Conversely, by applying
a strings-type Amp EG curve to an organ-type multi-
sample, you can produce a sound with a character
unlike a typical organ.
Arpeggiator settings
6.1: Ed–Arp.
BUS settings
7.1: Ed–InsertFX BUS
Piano
You can specify the oscillator routing (the signal sent to
the insert effect, master effects, and independent out-
Organ
Strings
Insert Effect settings
7.1: Ed–InsertFX Setup, IFX
Here you can select insert effect and make settings for
Master Effect settings
7.2: Ed–MasterFX
LFO settings
5.3: Ed–LFOs
For each oscillator, you can use two LFO (Low Fre-
quency Oscillator) units: LFO1 and LFO2. You are free
to select the type of each LFO and set its speed.
The depth of the LFO1 and LFO2 that you specify here
is adjusted by the settings of the 3.1: Ed-Pitch, 4.1: Ed-
Filter1, 4.2: Ed-Filter2, 5.1: Ed-Amp1, and 5.2: Ed-
Amp2 pages.
Here you can select master effects and make settings
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More about Alternate Modulation
Auto Song Setup function
Alternate Modulation is a type of modulation that can
be used to control various aspects of the sound.
This function automatically applies the settings of the
current program or combination to a new song in the
sequencer.
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) refers to any of
the numerous sources that can control alternate modu-
lation, and includes controllers that you operate physi-
cally such as the joystick and realtime controllers,
incoming MIDI data, as well as modulators such as the
EG or LFO.
Since this instrument allows you apply modulation to
a modulator, this type of control is referred to as “alter-
nate modulation.”
If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while
you’re playing a program or combination, you can use
this function to start recording immediately.
Hold down the [ENTER] key and press the
SEQUENCER [REC/ WRITE] key. The “Setup to
Record” dialog box will open and ask “Are you sure?”.
Press [F8] (“OK”) key. You will automatically enter
Sequencer mode, and will be in the record-ready state.
Press the [START/ STOP] key to start the sequencer
and begin recording.
Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree (speed or
depth) to which AMS will control alternate modula-
tion.
Combinations of modulations that are frequently used
in on the synthesizer. performance (such as using the
joystick to vary the pitch) are also provided as special
parameters separately from alternate modulation.
This instrument provides 29 types of alternate modula-
tion.
In single mode you can use 29 alternate modulation
destinations of 29 types, and in double mode you can
use 55 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types.
There are 42 AMS sources. (However depending on the
type of modulation, some sources cannot be selected.)
For details on alternate modulation and AMS, refer to
PG p.215.
Suggestions on using alternate modulation
When making settings for alternate modulation, think
of the effect that you wish to produce, what type of
modulation will be necessary to produce that effect,
and what parameter of the oscillator, filter, or amplifier
needs to be controlled. Then select a source (“AMS”)
and set the “Intensity.” If you proceed logically in this
way, you will achieve the desired effect.
For example if you want to “control a guitar-like sound
so that it appears to be approaching feedback when the
joystick is moved away,” you will make settings so that
the joystick controls filter modulation or the resonance
level.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination mode
In Combination mode you select, play and edit combi-
nations.
If a program being edited in Program mode is
used in a combination, it will sound according to
the settings being edited.
Combination mode consists of pages 1.1: Play–7.2: Ed-
MasterFX.
In 1.1: Play; you can select and play combinations. You
can also do some overall editing, and make arpeggia-
If you wish to save an edited combination in inter-
In 2.1: Ed–Basic–7.2: Ed–MasterFX; you can edit the
parameters of the combination that was selected in 1.1:
Play.
Suggestions for editing procedure
The parameters of each timbre are set in 2.1: Ed-Prog/
Mix–4.4: MIDI Filter4, and 7.1:Ed-InsertFX. This is
where you create the basic combination consisting of
the programs you select here.
First use 2.1: Ed-Prog/ Mix to select the program for
each timbre, and then use 3.3: Ed-Key Zone and 3.4:
Ed-Vel Zone to specify the range in which each pro-
gram will sound (layer, split, velocity switch, etc.).
Then adjust the volume of each timbre, and set various
other parameters.
How a combination is organized
A combination consists of a variety of parameters that
can be accessed in 2.1: Ed-Basic–7.2: Ed-MasterFX. The
diagram below shows how a combination is struc-
tured.
To add finishing touches to the sound, you can make
insert effect settings (in 7.1: Ed-InsertFX) and master
effect and master EQ settings (in 7.2: Ed-MasterFX)
that are separate from the effect settings of Program
mode. In addition, you can make arpeggiator settings
(in 6.1: Ed-Arp.) and controller settings (in 2.2: Ed-Ctrl)
to create the finished combination.
Basic combination editing
Banks A, B, and C of the TR contain a variety of combi-
nations that use the preloaded programs (banks A, B,
C) and the preset and preloaded user arpeggio patterns
and effects. You can edit these combinations to create
your own original combinations.
By using the Utility “Solo Selected Timbre”, you
can listen only to the selected timbre. This is a con-
venient way to audition individual sounds of tim-
Original programs using samples/ multisamples
recorded in Sampling mode (if the separately sold
EXB-SMPL option is installed) or loaded into memory
in Media mode can also be used in a combination.
Combinations you edit or create can be written into the
384 combination memory areas of banks A–C. They
can also be saved and managed on SD card in Media
In pages that display all timbres 1–8, such as 2.1:
Ed-Prog/ Mix, you can use the [ ], [ ] keys to
select timbres. You can also select timbres directly
by holding down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key and
pressing one of the [F1 T1/ T9]–[F8 T8/ T16] keys.
Controller Setup : 2.2
Arpeggiator: 6.1
Timbre1
Program
Parameters
Parameters
Parameters
Parameters
Master Effect 1, 2 :
7.2-1...3
Insert Effect :
7.1-1
Timbre2
Program
Insert Effect :
7.1-2, 3
MasterEQ :7.2-4
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Timbre3
Program
Timbre
Timbre4
Program
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1,2
Insert Effect
Master Effect
Individual Outputs
Parameters
Timbre8
Program
7.1-1 or 7.2-1 etc. indicate pages or tab screens used on this instrument for editing.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Layer, split, and velocity switch
The Compare function
Within a combination, you can use keyboard location
and velocity to change the program that sounds. The
programs assigned to each timbre can sound in three
ways: as a layer, a split, or a velocity switch. A combi-
nation can be set to use any one of these methods, or to
use two or more of these methods.
As you are editing a combi, you can use the [COM-
PARE] key to listen to the previously saved version (as
it was before you began editing). Press the [COM-
PARE] key (the key light comes on) to hear the original
version. Pressing [COMPARE] again (the light goes
dark) returns you to the version you are editing.
If you continue editing when the [COMPARE] key
LED is lit, the LED will go dark, and the current
sound will now be the sound that is recalled when
the [COMPARE] key LED is dark.
Layer
Layer refers to settings which cause two or more pro-
grams to sound simultaneously when a note is played.
Program A
Program B
Layer:
In the section below, we will edit typical parameters
in each page while listening to the effect of each
parameter.
Two or more programs sound
simultaneously.
For a more detailed explanation of these parameters,
refer to PG p.31–.
Split
Split refers to settings which cause different programs
to sound on different areas of the keyboard.
Timbre 1–8 program, pan and volume
2.1: Ed–Prog/ Mix
Program B
Program A
Split:
Different programs will sound in
different areas of the keyboard.
Here you can assign programs to each timbre 1–8, and
set pan and volume for each. (These settings can also
be made in the Prog and Mix pages of 1.1: Play.)
Velocity switch
Velocity Switch refers to settings which cause different
programs to sound depending on the velocity (key-
board playing dynamics).
Prog page
Strong
Soft
Program B
Program A
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Velocity Switch:
Keyboard playing dynamics
(velocity) switches between
different programs.
On this instrument, you can use a different program
for each of up to eight timbres, and combine two or
more of the above methods to create even more com-
plex setups.
Program Select
Assigns a program to each timbre.
You can use the Utility menu command “Select by
Category” to select programs from 16 categories.
Program A
Program D
Program C
Strong
Soft
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Program B
Example:
B and C, D are split. In the lower
keyboard range, A and B are
layered. In the higher keyboard
range, C and D are switched by
velocity and layered with A.
You can also use the [BANK] and [A]–[GM] keys
to select the bank of the program.
If you wish to select programs by receiving MIDI
program changes, do so in P1.1: Play.
As an additional possibility, you can set the slope for a
key zone or velocity zone so that the volume dimin-
ishes gradually. This lets you change a split into a key-
board crossfade, or a velocity switch into a velocity
crossfade.
Keyboard X-Fade
Program B
Program A
(keyboard crossfade):
As you play from low notes
to high notes, the volume of
A will fade out, and the
volume of B will fade in.
Program B
Program A
Strong
Soft
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Velocity X-Fade
(velocity crossfade):
As you play with increasingly
stronger velocity, the volume of
A will fade out, and the volume
of B will fade in.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Channel
Mix (Mixer) page
Timbres that you wish to play from this instrument’s
keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel. Your
playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global
MIDI channel, and will sound any timbre that matches
this channel. Normally you will set this to Gch. When
this is set to Gch, the MIDI channel of the timbre will
always match the global MIDI channel, even if you
change the global MIDI channel.
Pan
Specifies the panning (stereo location) for each timbre.
A setting of C064 will reproduce the oscillator pan set-
ting of the program. Moving this to left or right will
move the sound to left or right while preserving the
pan relationship between the oscillators. A setting of
L001 is far left, and R127 is far right.
On some preloaded combinations that use the
arpeggiator, timbres assigned to the arpeggiator
may not have a “Status” of INT and “MIDI Ch” of
Gch.
The reason for this is that these settings are for tim-
bres that sound only when the arpeggiator is on.
This is a very useful technique for creating combi-
nations that use the arpeggiator. Refer to “Arpeg-
ship between arpeggiator assignments, “Status,”
and “MIDI Channel.”
Volume
Adjusts the volume of each timbre.
Create the overall sound by adjusting the volume bal-
ance between timbres. The “Volume” setting is an
important aspect of creating the sound, and this setting
will have a significant effect on the overall impression
produced by the Combination.
Bank(EX2) MSB, Bank(EX2) LSB
This setting is valid when “Status” is set to EX2. It
specifies the Bank Select message that will be transmit-
ted from this instrument.
Controller settings
2.2: Ed–Ctrl
OSC page
Ctrls (Controls) page
Force OSC Mode
Normally you will set this to PRG.
If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound
monophonically, set this either to Mono or LGT
(Legato). Conversely, set this to Poly if you wish to
force a monophonic program to play polyphonically
(☞PG p.37).
For each combination, you can specify the functions of
the B-mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS
p.36, 224, 225)
Settings for status, MIDI channel, and
OSC Select
Normally you will set this to Both.
playing mode
3.1: Ed–Param1
If the timbre is using a program whose “Mode (Oscilla-
tor Mode)” is Double, and you want only OSC1 or
OSC2 (not both) to sound, set this to OSC1 (only OSC1
will sound) or OSC2 (only OSC2 will sound).
MIDI page
Portamento
Normally you will set this to PRG.
If you want the portamento setting specified for the
program of the timbre to be forced off, set this parame-
ter to Off. Conversely, if you want to forcibly turn the
portamento on, or to change the portamento time, set
this to a value of 001–127 to specify the portamento
time.
Status
Here you can specify the state of MIDI and the internal
tone generator for each timbre. Normally when sound-
ing the internal tone generator of this instrument, you
will set this to INT. Set this to Off for timbres that you
are not using. With settings of Off, EXT, or EX2, this
instrument will not sound. With settings of EXT or
EX2, you can control an external tone generator con-
nected via MIDI. (☞PG p.36)
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pitch page
Layer and split settings
3.3: Ed–Key Zone
Indicates settings such as layer, split, and keyboard
crossfade.
Key page
Specifies the range of notes that will sound each tim-
bre. Each area that sounds a timbre is referred to as a
Key Zone. By setting key zones, you can create a com-
bination in which different programs sound in differ-
ent areas of the keyboard.
Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)
These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre.
•
In a layer-type combination, you can set two or
more timbres to the same program, and create a
richer sound by using “Transpose” to shift their
pitch apart by an octave or by using “Detune” to
create a slight difference in pitch between the two.
In split-type combinations, you can use
“Transpose” to shift the pitch (in semitone units) of
the programs specified for each key zone.
If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum
program, use “Detune.” If you change the
“Transpose” setting, the correspondence between
notes and drum sounds will change.
By combining key zones specified for each timbre, you
can create layered or split combinations.
The upper and lower limits for the key zone of each
timbre are set by the “Top Key” and “Bottom Key”
respectively.
For example in the following diagram, timbres 1–3 are
set to create a layered and split combination. This is
specified by the key zone settings.
•
•
Timbres 2 and 3 create a layer. Timbre 1 and timbres 2/
3 are split between the B3 and C4 note numbers.
Strings
Brass
Timbre 3
Timbre 2
Timbre 1
Piano
Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or samples cre-
ated in Sampling mode (requires the EXB-SMPL
option be installed)
C–1
B3 C4
G9
If a timbre program uses multisamples or samples that
you created in Sampling mode (or loaded in Media
mode) to a specific BPM value, you can use the Utility
“Detune BPM Adjust” to call up a new specified BPM
value. This changes the BPM by changing the playback
pitch. (☞PG p.38)
As an example here, we will explain how to create a
combination like the one shown above.
1In the 1.1: Play, Prog page or the 2.1: Ed-Prog/Mix,
Prog page, use the “Program Select” area to select
the program that will be used for each timbre 1–3.
Select a piano program for timbre 1.
Select a brass program for timbre 2.
Select a strings program for timbre 3.
2In the MIDI page of 3.1: Ed-Param1, set “Status” to
INT for all the timbres that you wish to use, and
set “MIDI Channel” to either Gch or to match the
global MIDI channel (a “G” will be displayed
after the channel number).
Note timing and scale settings
3.2: Ed–Param2
Other page
3In the Key page of 3.3: Edit-Key Zone, set “Top
Key” and “Bottom Key.”
Set timbre 1 to a “Top Key” of G9 and a “Bottom
Key” of C4.
Set timbres 2 and 3 to a “Top Key” of B3 and a “Bot-
tom Key” of C–1.
Delay [ms]
You can also enter these values by holding down
the [ENTER] key and playing a note on the key-
board of this instrument.
Specifies the timing at which the program of each tim-
bre will sound. Specify the time from when you play
the keyboard until the program will sound.
If you select KeyOff for this parameter, the timbre will
sound when the note is released.
Slope page
Here you can specify the range of keys over which the
original volume will be reached, starting at the top key
and bottom key.
Use Prog’s Scale, Combi’s Scale
Specifies the scale for each timbre. If you check “Use
Prog’s Scale,” the scale specified by the program will
be used. Timbres for which this is not checked will use
the “Combi’s Scale” setting.
In the case of the above example, you could set the key
zones so that a portion of timbres 1 and 2 overlaps (i.e.,
is layered) with timbre 3, and set “Top Slope” and
“Bottom Slope” so that the sound changes gradually,
instead of changing suddenly between B3 and C4.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Velocity switch settings
3.4: Ed–Vel Zone
MIDI filter settings
4.1: Ed–MIDI Filter1–4.4: Ed–MIDI
Filter4
Here you can make settings for velocity switching and
velocity crossfading.
For each MIDI Filter item, you can specify whether or
not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmit-
ted and received. The checked items will be transmit-
ted and received.
Vel (Velocity) page
For each timbre, you can specify a range of velocities
for which it will sound. The range of velocities for
which a timbre will sound is called the Velocity Zone.
By setting a velocity zone, you can set up a timbre
which will be sounded only by notes played at a cer-
tain strength, and not by stronger or weaker notes.
By combining timbres that have differing velocity zone
settings, you can create velocity switched combina-
tions.
MIDI filter does not turn the function itself on/ off,
but specifies whether or not that MIDI message
will be transmitted and received. For example if
portamento is on, portamento will be applied to
the sound of this instrument even if “Portamento
SW CC#65” is unchecked.
For example if you selected a bass program for timbre
1 and a piano program for timbre 2 to create a split-
type combination, you could make the following set-
tings so that pressing the connected damper pedal
would apply the damper effect only to the piano pro-
gram of timbre 2.
The upper and lower limits of the velocity zone of each
timbre are determined by the “Top Velocity” and “Bot-
tom Velocity” respectively. The following diagram
shows an example of a velocity switched combination
in velocity will switch between timbres 1 and 2 to play
different programs. Such combinations are created by
setting the velocity zone.
Set “Damper CC#64” in 4.1: Ed-MIDI Filter1,
MIDI 1-2 page.
127
Timbre 1
Timbre 2
Brass
Timbre 1 “Damper CC#64”: unchecked
Timbre 2 “Damper CC#64”: checked
64
63
1
Velocity
switch
Strings
As an example, we will explain how to create a combi-
nation like the one shown above.
1In the 1.1: Play, Prog page or the 2.1: Ed-Prog/Mix,
Prog page, use the “Program Select” area to select
the program that will be used for each timbre 1
and 2.
Select a brass program for timbre 1.
Select a strings program for timbre 2.
Arpeggiator settings
6.1: Ed–Arp.
2In the MIDI page of 3.1: Ed-Param1, set “Status” to
INT for all the timbres that you wish to use, and
set “MIDI Channel” to either Gch or to match the
global MIDI channel (a “G” will be displayed
after the channel number).
Bus settings
7.1: Ed–InsertFX BUS
3In 3.4: Ed–Vel Zone Vel page, set the “Top Veloc-
ity” and “Bottom Velocity.”
Specifies the routing for each timbre (i.e., how it is sent
to the insert effect, master effects, and individual out-
Set timbre 1 to a “Top Velocity” of 127 and a “Bot-
tom Velocity” of 64.
Set timbre 2 to a “Top Velocity” of 63 and a “Bot-
tom Velocity” of 1.
Insert Effect settings
7.1: Ed–InsertFX Setup, IFX
You can also enter these values by holding down
the [ENTER] key and playing a note on the key-
board of this instrument.
Indicates insert effect, and make settings for them.
Slope page
Here you can specify the range of values over which
the original volume will be reached, starting from the
top velocity and bottom velocity.
Master Effect settings
7.2: Ed–MasterFX
In the case of the above example, you could set the
velocity zones of the two timbres so that they partially
overlap, and set “Top Slope” and “Bottom Slope” so
that the sound changes gradually, instead of changing
suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64.
Indicates master effects, and make settings for them.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Song Setup function
This function automatically applies the settings of the
current combination to a new song.
If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while
you’re playing a combination, you can use this func-
tion to start recording immediately.
Hold down the [ENTER] key and press the
SEQUENCER [REC/ WRITE] key. The “Setup to
Record” dialog box will open and ask “Are you sure?”.
Press [F8] (“OK”) key. You will automatically enter
Sequencer mode, and will be in the record-ready state.
Press the [START/ STOP] key to start the sequencer
and begin recording.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequencer mode
This instrument contains a 16-multi track MIDI
•
Various methods of recording are supported,
sequencer. The sequencer is the center to which TR’s
numerous functions are integrated, allowing it to be
used in a variety of situations including music produc-
tion and live performance.
including realtime recording in which your
performance on the keyboard and controllers
(including MIDI control events) is recorded just as
you play, and step recording in which the timing,
length, and velocity of each note can be specify in
the LCD as you input the pitches from the
keyboard.
The musical data and control events that you
recorded can be edited in various ways (including
event editing and many other edit commands).
When the “Status” of a track is set to INT or BTH,
an external sequencer can be used to play this
instrument as a multi-timbral tone generator.
When the “Status” of a track is set to BTH, EXT, or
EXT2, the sequencer of this instrument can play
external tone generators.
When you turn off the power, the settings made in
Sequencer mode and the song data, cue list data,
and user pattern data that you recorded are not
backed up. If you wish to keep this data, you must
save it on external media (SD card etc.) before
turning off the power, or perform a MIDI data
dump to save the data on an external data filer etc.
•
•
If you wish to save the programs, track parame-
ters, effects, and arpeggiator function settings etc.
selected for a song as a template song, use the Util-
ity menu command “Save Template Song.”
•
•
Playback can be synchronized with an external
MIDI device.
Immediately after the power is turned on, this
instrument will not contain any cue list data or
song data, so if you wish to playback a song on the
sequencer, you must first load data from external
media (SD card etc.) or receive a MIDI data dump
p.146)
This instrument’s AMS (Alternate Modulation)
capability lets you use control changes for realtime
control of the parameters of the programs used in a
program. Its MIDI Sync. functionality lets you
synchronize the LFO speed to changes in the tempo.
Dmod (Dynamic Modulation) functionality lets
you control effect parameters in realtime. You can
also use MIDI Sync. to synchronize the LFO speed
or delay time to changes in the tempo.
•
•
You can assign names not only to the song, but also
to each pattern and track.
Features of the sequencer
•
The sequencer lets you record a maximum of
200,000 events (note data etc.), up to 200 songs, and
as many as 999 measures per song.
•
•
Combination settings can be copied to a song.
Sequencer data such as a song or cue list that you
create can be saved in this instrument’s native
format, or transmitted as a MIDI data dump.
A song you created can be converted into SMF
(Standard MIDI File) data. SMF songs can also be
loaded.
The PLAY/ MUTE/ REC and “SOLO On/ Off” let
you instantly play/ mute any desired track.
You can rewind or fast-forward while listening to
the sound.
•
Up to 20 cue lists can be created.
A cue list is an arrangement of up to 99 songs that
will be played as a chain. You can specify the num-
ber of times that each song will repeat. Songs in a
cue list can also be converted into a single song.
The arpeggiator function can be used for playback
or recording.
The RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Recording)
function can be used for playback or recording.
Sixteen different template songs are built-in, and
contain program and effect settings suitable for
various musical styles. Up to sixteen original
templates that you create can be saved as user
template songs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The [LOCATE] key lets you move quickly to a
desired location.
•
If the EXB-SMPL (sold separately) option is
installed, multisamples you create can be played in
Sequencer mode together with the internal
programs.
The Time Slice function of Sampling mode lets you
divide a rhythm loop sample and create perfor-
mance data that corresponds to the divided sam-
ples. In Sequencer mode you can play this
performance data, and adjust the playback tempo
without affecting the pitch of the rhythm loop sam-
ple. You can also exchange the note numbers of the
data, or modify the timing to freely re-create the
original rhythm loop.
•
One stereo insertion effect, two master effects,
and a stereo master EQ can be used for each song.
Timing resolution is a maximum of ꢀ /192.
Sixteen tracks are provided for musical data, and a
master track contains time signature and tempo
data that controls the playback.
•
•
•
•
A track play loop function lets you loop specified
measures independently for each track.
150 preset patterns ideal for drum tracks are built
in. In addition, you can create up to 100 user
patterns for each song. These patterns can be used
as musical data within a song, or can be played by
the RPPR function.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patterns
The structure of Sequencer mode
There are two types of patterns: preset patterns and
user patterns.
The following describes the structure of Sequencer
mode. (see diagram below)
•
•
Preset patterns: Patterns suitable for drum tracks
are preset in internal memory, and can be selected
for any song.
Songs
User patterns: Each song can have up to 100
patterns. When using a pattern in a different song,
use the Utility menu commands “Copy Pattern” or
“Copy From Song” etc. to copy the pattern. The
pattern length can be specified in units of a
measure.
A song consists of tracks 1–16, a master track, song
parameters such as the song name, effect, arpeggiator
and RPPR parameters, and 100 user patterns.
A maximum of 200 such songs can be created on this
instrument.
Tracks 1–16 and the master track each consist of setup
parameters located at the start location, and musical
data within the track.
Each pattern consists of musical data for one track. It is
not possible to create patterns that contain multiple
tracks.
These patterns can be used as track musical data by
being placed in a track (Utility menu command “Put
to Track”) or copied to a track (Utility menu command
“Copy to Track”). Alternatively, you can use a pattern
with the RPPR function of a song.
Setup parameters
Tracks 1–16
Bank/ Program No.*, PLAY/ MUTE/ REC, Pan*, Vol-
ume*, Track Play Loop, Loop Start Measure, Loop
End Measure, Status, MIDI Channel, Bank Select
(When Status=EX2), Force OSC Mode, OSC Select,
Portamento*, Transpose**, Detune**, Bend Range**,
OSC On/ Off Ctrl, Delay, Use Program's Scale, MIDI
Filter, Key Zone, Velocity Zone, Track Name, IFX/
Indiv.Out BUS Select, Send1(MFX1)*, Send2(MFX2)*
Master track
Cue List
A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in
succession. The TR allows you to create 20 cue lists.
Each cue list allows you to connect a maximum of 99
songs in any order, and to specify the number of times
that each song will repeat.
Time signature*, Tempo*
Musical data
The page menu command “Convert to Song” lets you
convert the two or more songs in a cue list into a single
song. This allows you to use a cue list to create the
backing, then convert the cue list into a song and add
solo phrases on unused tracks.
Tracks 1–16
Note On/ Off, Program Change (including Bank
Select), Pitch Bend, After Touch (Poly After), Con-
trol Change, Pattern No.
* When you change the setting during realtime-
recording, this will be recorded as musical data.
This allows the starting settings to be modified
during the playback.
** Musical data (MIDI RPN data) can be used to
change the starting settings during playback.
For details on control changes and RPN, refer to
PG p.236, 239.
Pattern U00 ... U99
RPPR Setup
: 5.1
Controller Setup : 2.2
Arpeggiator: 6.1–1…5
(A, B)
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Setup parameters
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Musical data
Master Effect 1, 2 :
7.2–1...3
BUS : 7.1–1, 2
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Insert Effect :
7.1–3, 4
MasterEQ : 7.2–4
Track
AUDIO OUTPUT
INDIVIDUAL 1,2
Insert Effect
Master Effect
Individual Outputs
Musical data
Track 16
Setup parameters
Master Track
Tempo, time signature data
7.1-1 or 7.2-1 etc. indicate pages or tab screens used on this instrument for editing.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the cursor keys to move to “Copy Pattern to
Track too?” Press the [INC] key to check the check
box.
Producing a song
This section describes how to use the TR’s sequencer.
As an example, we will create a song by following the
order outlined below.
If this is checked, a drum pattern will be copied to
the song after the template song is loaded.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to load the template
song.
“Creating the basic song”
Here we will use the convenient functions of the TR’s
sequencer (e.g., template songs, preset patterns, arpeg-
giator) to perform realtime recording and step record-
ing.
A dialog box will appear.
“Editing the song”
Here we will edit the song that we created in “Creating
the basic song.”
Make sure that Preset, P109: AcidJazz 1/Std2 is
selected at the right of “Pattern.” If not, use the
VALUE controller to select it.
“Creating a cue list”
Here we will complete the song by creating a cue list
for the song that we copied etc. in “Editing the song.”
You can press the [START/ STOP] key to hear the
selected pattern. To stop, press the [START/ STOP]
key once again.
Press the [F6] (“Copy”) key to copy the pattern.
Creating the basic song
The “Measure” value will change from 001 to 009.
This indicates that the pattern has been copied from
measure 1 to measure 8, and that the next time you
press the [F6] (“Copy”) key, the pattern will be cop-
ied from measure 9.
1. Loading a template song, and copying
preset patterns (drum phrases)
1Turn off the power. Then turn it on again.
When you turn off the power, all songs will be
erased. Be sure to save any important data before
you perform this step.
This explanation assumes that you are starting
from the default state immediately after power-on.
Press the [F7] (“Exit”) key.
In the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Play/ REC page, the
2Press the [SEQ] key to enter Sequencer mode.
“Song Select” field will indicate S000: Acid Jazz.
Song Select
3Load a template song.
Track Select
Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the Utility
menu, and then use the [F7] key or the cursor keys
to select “Load Template Song” and press the [F8]
(“OK”) key.
Preset patterns can be used in a song even after the
above steps. This can be done by using the Utility
menu commands “Put Pattern” or “Copy Pattern”
(SEQ 5.1: RPPR, Pattern page) (☞PG p.71).
A dialog box will appear.
4When you play the keyboard, you will hear the
drum program for track 1 of the template song that
was loaded.
5Press the [ ] key to select “Track Select” T01:
Make sure that the template song name at the right
of “From” is highlighted, and use the VALUE con-
troller to select P13: Acid Jazz.
Drums.
“Track Select” is the track that will be used to
record/ play song data. Normally, the track selected
here can be played from the keyboard, and during
recording, your performance will be recorded on
this track (in cases other than Multi REC or Master
Track).
There are 16 template songs, each containing pro-
gram, pan, volume, and effect settings suitable for
various styles of music. By loading a template into
a song, you can begin recording immediately with-
out having to make the same frequently-used set-
tings each time. If you want to specify the program
and volume etc. yourself from scratch, refer to
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the VALUE control to select T02: Bass, and
play it from the keyboard. Next select T03–T08 in
order, and play them from the keyboard. (The TR
has sixteen sequence tracks, but this template song
specifies only tracks 1–8.)
Select T03: Elec.Piano.
3. Recording the bass track
1If playback is occurring, press the [START/STOP]
key to stop playback.
Press the [LOCATE] key to return to the beginning
of the song.
The location will indicate 001:01.000.
6Press the [START/STOP] key to play back the pre-
set pattern that you copied. Play the keyboard
while you listen to the drum pattern.
2Press the [EXIT] key to access the 1.1: Play/REC
page.
7Press the [START/STOP] key to stop.
3Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
to record.
In this example, select T02: Bass.
2. Repeatedly playing specific measures of
a track (Track Play Loop)
Here’s how to use Track Play Loop to repeatedly play
back a drum phrase.
1Press the [MENU] key to access the page menu.
Press the [START/STOP] key to start playback,
and practice playing the phrase that you want to
record.
When you are finished rehearsing, press the
[START/STOP] key to stop playback.
Press the [F1] key to select “Loop,” and press the
[F8] (“Open”) key.
Press the [LOCATE] key.
The SEQ 1.2: Loop, Track Play Loop page will
appear.
When the power is turned on, the “Recording
Mode” of the TR will be set to Over Write record-
ing, in which newly recorded data will be over-
written. For details on other recording modes,
When recording rapid or difficult phrases, you can
slow down the tempo and record at a more com-
fortable tempo. Simply adjust the “Tempo.” After
recording, restore the original tempo.
2Check track 1 “Loop On,” leave “Loop Start Meas”
as it is, and set “Loop End Meas” to 008.
3When you press the [START/STOP] key, the drum
phrase will be played back repeatedly.
When the playback has repeated for the number of
measures in the song as specified by “Length” (the
power-on default is 64 measures), it will stop auto-
matically.
You can use the Quantize and Resolution func-
tions to correct the timing of your performance as
it is recorded.
By using “Play Intro” you can begin the loop after
adding an introduction (☞PG p.58).
Track Play Loop will continue repeating for the
number of measures specified by “Length.” If you
want to limit the number of repetitions or place
other performance data (e.g., a drum fill-in) in that
track, you will need to expand the pattern into
actual performance data. Use the SEQ 5.2: Track
Edit Utility menu command “Repeat Measure” to
specify the number of playback repetitions and
expand the pattern as playback data. In the sample
illustration below, performance data will be cre-
ated to play measures 1–8 of track 1 for four times
(i.e., 32 measures).
For example during realtime recording, suppose
that you input eighth notes at slightly inaccurate
timing, as shown in line 1 of the diagram below. If
you set “Reso” (Resolution) to ꢂ and performed
realtime recording, the timing would automati-
cally be corrected as shown in line 2. With a setting
of Hi, the performance will be recorded with the
exact timing at which it was played.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Recording arpeggio patterns
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
The performance of an arpeggio pattern can be
recorded into a song. With the settings of this template
song, the arpeggiator will function on track 4.
ꢂ
ꢂ
1In “Track Select,” choose T04: Guitar.
2Press the [ARP ON/OFF] key.
3Press the [START/STOP] key and play single
There is also a “Quantize” function (SEQ 5.2: Track
Edit Utility menu command) which corrects the tim-
ing of performance data after it has been input. If
you have already recorded (without using realtime
quantize) and later notice during playback that the
timing is not quite right (as in line 1 of the preceding
diagram), you can select the SEQ 5.2: Track Edit
Utility menu command “Quantize,” set “Resolu-
tion” to ꢂ, and press the [F8] (“OK”) key to correct
the timing as shown in line 2.
notes or chords.
Verify that arpeggios are sounded in synchroniza-
tion with the tempo of the drum and bass perfor-
mance, and rehearse your performance.
4Press the [START/STOP] key to stop playback.
Then press the [LOCATE] key to move the location
to the beginning of the song.
5Start recording.
Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
[START/STOP] key.
4Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
You will hear the metronome. The TR will be in
record-ready mode. (☞Refer to PG p.57 for details
on metronome settings.)
If you play notes on the keyboard during the count-
in, the arpeggio will begin at the same time that
recording begins, and then that pattern will be
recorded.
5Press the [START/STOP] key.
Play the keyboard for about 16 measures and
record your performance.
After a two-measure count, recording will begin.
Play the keyboard for about 16 measures, and
record your performance.
Press the [START/STOP] key to stop recording.
If you make a mistake or decide to re-record, press
the [START/ STOP] key to stop recording, and press
the [COMPARE] key.
If you made a mistake or would like to re-record,
you can use the Compare function (press the [COM-
PARE] key) to re-record as many times as you wish.
When you press the [COMPARE] key to execute the
Compare function, you will return to the state prior
be compared in Sequencer mode.)
The arpeggio pattern is recorded as the note data
that was generated. If you operate ARP-GATE or
ARP-VELOCITY while recording an arpeggio pat-
tern, this data will be recorded, but it will not be
possible to add changes by overdubbing ARP-
GATE or ARP-VELOCITY data afterward for
those notes.
6When you are satisfied with your performance,
press the [START/STOP] key to stop recording.
For example if your performance in measures 5–8
was the best take, you can use the Track Play Loop
function to repeatedly play back just this portion.
In the SEQ 1, 2: Loop, Track Play Loop page, check
“Loop On” for track 2, set “Loop Start Meas” to
005, and set “Loop End Meas” to 008.
5. Recording other tracks
1As described in “Recording the bass track,” use
“Track Select” to select T03: Elec.Piano, and record
about 16 measures.
6. Step recording
The TR provides two main methods of recording a
song. The first is realtime recording, in which your
performance on the keyboard and operations of the
joystick and other controllers are recorded in realtime.
This is how we recorded the bass and electric piano
tracks in the preceding sections.
When you press the [START/ STOP] key, repeated
playback will begin.
The second method is step recording, in which you
can specify the timing, note length, and velocity etc. in
the LCD screen, and use the keyboard to input the
pitch of the note. only the note-on/ off data is recorded.
Step recording is suitable when you want to create a
distinctive mechanical feel, or when you want to
After you press the [START/ STOP] key to stop
playback, we recommend that you press the
[LOCATE] key to return to the beginning of the
song. After recording, you will automatically
return to the measure at which recording began.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
record phrases that would be impossible or too rapid
to play “live.”
6On the keyboard, press and then release the first
note that you want to input.
The LCD screen will show numerical values for the
data that you input. In the lower right, Next:[M001
01.000] will change to [M001 01.048], and when you
input the next note, the data will be input at that
location.
Rapid phrases can also be recorded in realtime by
temporarily slowing down the sequencer tempo.
Here’s the procedure for step recording.
1Press the [MENU] key to access the page menu.
Press the [F5] key to select “TEdit,” and press the
[F8] (“Open”) key.
Continue pressing notes to input a melody.
You can also delete notes or rests, or input rests or
ties. (☞PG p.75)
The SEQ 5.2: Track Edit screen will appear.
•
To delete a note or rest that you input, press the
[F6] (“Back”) key. The previously-input note
will be deleted.
•
•
To input a rest, press the [F4] (“Rest”) key. This
will input a rest of the “Step” value.
To modify the length of a note, you can modify
the “Step” value before you input the note.
However if you want to extend the length (tie)
of the note, press the [F5] (“Tie”). At this time,
the previously-input note will be extended by
the length of “Step.”
2Press the [ ] key to set “Track Select” to T08
(Ch:08) Lead Synth.
For this example we will input a lead performance
using an analog synthesizer sound.
3Press the [ ] key to select “Measure (From),” and
press the [DEC] key to set this to M:001.
With this setting, step recording will begin from
measure 1.
If you want to check the note that you will input
next, press the [PAUSE] key. In this state, playing a
key will produce sound, but will not input a note.
Press the [PAUSE] key once again to cancel the
record-pause state, and resume input.
4Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to display the Util-
ity menu, press the [F7] key or the cursor keys to
select “Step Recording,” and press the [F8] (“OK”)
key.
A dialog box will appear.
To input a chord, simultaneously press the notes
of the desired chord. Even if you do not press them
simultaneously, notes that were pressed before
you took your hand off of all keys will be input at
the same location.
However in the above example, the program of
track 8 will not sound chords. This is because the
program is set to mono mode, and the song fol-
lows the setting of the program. In other words
because this track is set to “Force OSC Mode”
PRG, the “Voice Assign Mode” setting of Mono
for the program B042: Express Lead remains valid.
5Press the [ ] key to select “Step.” Press the [INC]
key or [DEC] key to select ꢁ (16th note).
The step indicates the basic note value (length of a
note or rest) that will be used when entering notes
from the keyboard.
7When you are finished inputting, press the [F8]
To input a triplet or dotted note, select the “–” at
the right, and press the [INC] key or [DEC] key.
Select “3” for a triplet, or “.” for a dotted note.
(“Done”) key.
8Press the [START/STOP] key to play back.
“Duration” indicates the length that the note itself
will sound. Smaller values will produce a staccato
note, and larger values will produce a legato note.
For this example, leave this setting unchanged.
When you begin step recording, all data following
the recorded measure will be erased from that
track.
You need to be aware of this if you begin step
recording from a measure mid-way through the
song.
If you want to re-input data into a measure that
already contains data, perform step recording in
another un-recorded track, and execute “Move
Measure” or “Copy Measure” (☞PG p.79).
If you want to edit or add to the recorded data,
you can use the “Event Edit” function (☞PG p.75).
“Vel.” is the velocity (playing strength), and larger
values will produce a louder volume. Set this to
about 090.
If you select Key for this parameter, the velocity
with which you actually played the keyboard will
be input.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Using controllers to record tonal
changes
Let’s try using the realtime controllers and the joystick
to add effects to the performance that we just step-
recorded on track 8.
Convenient functions for song production and
checking the track settings
Monitoring just a specific track/ Muting just
a specific track (Solo/ Mute functions)
1Press the [EXIT] key, and then press the [F6]
(“Pref.”) key to move to the SEQ 1.1: Play/Rec,
Preference page.
The TR provides a Solo function that lets you play only
a specific track 1–16, and a Mute function that silences
only a specific track. These functions can be used in
various ways. For example you can intentionally mute
or solo specific tracks, or listen only to the rhythm sec-
tion of the previously-recorded tracks while you record
new tracks.
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Over Dub.
Over Dub allows you to add to a previously-
recorded track.
Let’s try out the Mute and Solo functions.
1In SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, press the [F2] (“Prog..8”) key
to access the Program page.
Press the [START/STOP] key.
2Select the track 1 “PLAY/MUTE/REC, ” and press
3For “Track Select,” make sure that T08: Lead Synth
the [INC] key once.
is selected.
The display will change to “MUTE,” and the play-
back of track 1 will no longer be heard. In this way,
the “mute” function allows you to silence a speci-
fied track unil the track is un-muted.
Press the [START/ STOP] key to start playback, and
operate the realtime controllers and joystick to
rehearse. When you are finished rehearsing, press
the [START/ STOP] key to stop. Press the [LOCATE]
key.
4Start recording.
Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
[START/STOP] key.
After a two-measure count-in, recording will begin.
Select the track 2 “PLAY/MUTE/REC” and press
the [INC] key once.
Operate the LFO CUTOFF or RESONANCE/HPF
realtime controllers or the joystick (±Y axis) to
record their movements.
When selecting the parameters of various tracks as
above, you can also make your selection by hold-
ing down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key and pressing
one of the [F1] (T1/ T9)–[F8] (T8/ T16) keys.
When you are finished performing, press the
[START/STOP] key.
If you make a mistake or want to re-record, press
the [COMPARE] key to execute the Compare func-
tion, and then re-record.
The display will change, and the playback of track 2
will also be muted.
8. Saving the song
Remember to save the song you created. The data will
be lost when the power of the TR is turned off. Refer to
To cancel muting, press the “PLAY/MUTE/REC”
and press the [DEC] key.
3Next select the track 1 “SOLO On/Off” and press
the [INC] key once.
The display will change, and now only the track 1
playback will be heard. In this way, the Solo func-
tion lets you hear only a specified track.
If both Mute and Solo are used, the Solo function
will be given priority.)
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the track 2 “SOLO On/Off” and press the
[INC] key once.
2. Set the pan and volume of each track
(SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Mixer page)
The display will change, and only the playback of
tracks 1 and 2 will be heard.
In the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Mixer page, “Pan” sets
the pan of each track, and “Volume” sets the vol-
ume of each track.
To turn off the Solo function, select the “SOLO
On/Off” and press the [DEC] key once again.
Select the track 1 and 2 “SOLO On/Off” and press
the [DEC] key once each.
3. Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel
that will sound each track (SEQ 3.1: Param1,
MIDI page)
The display will change, and the playback of tracks
1 and 2 will be muted. If the Solo function is turned
off for all tracks, playback will be according to the
“PLAY/ MUTE/ REC” settings.
By using the Utility menu command “Solo
Selected Track,” you can listen to the sound of
only the selected track. This is convenient when
you want to set track parameters or to make effect
settings. (☞PG p.51)
In the SEQ 3.1: Param1, MIDI page, “Status” speci-
fies whether each track will sound the internal tone
generator or an external tone generator. “MIDI
Channel” specifies the MIDI channel for each track.
[LOCATE] settings
By pressing the [LOCATE] key you can move to a
specified location.
If the track status “Status” is set to INT, playing the
track data or operating the TR’s keyboard or con-
trollers will cause the TR’s internal tone generator to
be sounded and controlled.
If “Status” is set to EXT, EX2, or BTH, playing the
track data or operating the TR’s keyboard or con-
trollers will cause an external tone generator to be
sounded and controlled. (The MIDI channel of the
external tone generator must be set to match the
“MIDI Channel” of TR tracks that are set to EXT,
EX2 or BTH.)
The location is specified by the Utility menu command
“Set Location.” You can also hold down the [ENTER]
key and press the [LOCATE] key to set the location
even during playback (☞PG p.54).
Normally you will set this to 001:01.000. You will
return to the beginning of the song.
When you select a song, the [LOCATE] setting will
automatically be set to 001:01.000.
If “Status” is set to BTH, both the external tone gen-
erator and the TR’s own tone generator will be
sounded and controlled.
If you are using the TR’s Sequencer mode as a 16-
track multi-timbral tone generator, set this parame-
ter to INT or BTH. (☞”Status” PG p.62)
Making track settings for a new song
Here’s how to make basic settings for a new song, such
as assigning a program to each track, and setting the
volume etc. You can check these settings for the tem-
plate song you loaded earlier.
In general, you should set “MIDI Channel” to dif-
ferent channels 1–16 for each track. Tracks that are
sent to the same MIDI channel will sound simulta-
neously when either is recorded or played.
1. Assign a program to each track
(SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Program page)
4. Make effect settings
(SEQ 7.1: Insert FX, SEQ 7.2: Master FX)
Make settings for each effect in SEQ 7.1: Insert FX
In the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Program page, use “Pro-
gram Select” to assign a program to each track.
5. Set the tempo and time signature
(SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC)
At this time you can also use the Utility menu com-
mand “Select by Category” to select programs by
category (☞PG p.55).
You can also use the Utility menu command “Copy
From Combi” to copy settings from a combination
Make these settings in SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC. “Tempo”
sets the tempo, and “Meter” sets the time signature.
(☞PG p.50)
6. Make other settings as necessary
As necessary, make arpeggiator settings (SEQ 6.1:
Arp.) and MIDI filter settings (SEQ 4.1–4.4: MIDI
Filter 1–4). (☞PG p.49–87)
When assigning a program, you can use “Track
Select” to select the track for which you are mak-
ing assignments, and try playing the sound.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you are finished making these settings, the basic
setup is complete. Record as described in “3. Record-
2. Naming a song
Here’s how to assign a name to a song you created.
1Choose “Song Select,” and use the VALUE control-
ler to select a song. For this example, select song
002.
2In the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC page, select the Utility
menu command “Rename Song,” and press the
[F8] (“OK”) key.
Song editing methods
A song can be edited in a variety of ways. Here we will
explain various ways in which the song we recorded in
the preceding pages can be edited for the purpose of
creating a Cue List (explained in the section that fol-
lows).
1. Copying a song
Here’s how to copy a song. This is convenient when
you want to create different variations based on a song.
1Create a new song.
A dialog box will appear. Press the [F5] (“Name”)
key to access the text dialog box.
Press the [F1] (“Clear”) key, and input CHORUS
When you are finished inputting the name, press
the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Press the [EXIT] key to display the SEQ 1.1: Play/
REC page.
Choose “Song Select,” use the numeric keys to
input the song number that you want to newly cre-
ate, and press the [ENTER] key. (For example, press
the [1] key and then the [ENTER] key.)
A dialog box will appear.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key once again to execute the
Rename operation.
3As described in steps 1and 2, assign a name of
INTRO to S000, and VERSE to S001.
3. Setting the number of measures in the
song
Here’s how to specify the number of measures in the
song. When the power is turned on, this is set to 64
measures. If you realtime-record for more measures
than this, the song will be the length of the measures
you recorded.
Decide on the number of measures, input the num-
ber in “Set Length,” and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
1Select song S000: INTRO.
2Select the SEQ 5.2: Track Edit page.
A new song will be created. Next we will copy the
song settings and playback data of another song
into this newly created song.
In the SEQ 5.2: Track Edit page, press the [MENU]
key to access the page menu, select the [F5]
(“TEdit”) key, and then select [F8] (“Open”).
2Select the Utility menu command “Copy From
Song,” and press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
3Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key to access the Utility
menu.
This contains various commands for editing tracks
and measures.
A dialog box will appear. Select the song that you
want to copy (i.e., the copy source). If you select All,
all song settings and playback data will be copied
from that song. If you select Without Track/Pattern
Events, settings other than Play Loop and RPPR
will be copied. For this example, select All.
Select “Set Song Length,” and press the [F8]
(“OK”) key.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to execute the copy.
3As described in steps 1and 2, create one more
new song (S002), and copy song S000 to it.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A dialog box will appear.
5Press the [F8] (“UTILITY”) key, select the Utility
menu command “Shift/Ers.Note,” and press the
[F8] (“OK”) key.
Input the number of measures for the song. For
this example, select 008 (8 measures) and press the
[F8] (“OK”) key.
The performance data from measures 1–8 will
remain, and the data of subsequent measures will be
deleted. When you press the [START/ STOP] key to
play the song, playback will stop at the end of the
8th measure.
A dialog box will appear. If you did not specify the
range of measures in step 4, set “From Measure”–
”To Measure” to specify the range that will be
edited.
Set “Mode” to Shift (Replace), and set the value to
+003. (☞PG p.81)
If you are using Track Play Loop, check whether
the measures specified for “Loop Start Meas” and
“Loop End Meas” would be deleted. If they would
be deleted, use “Move Measure” (☞PG p.79) etc.
to move the data into the playback area before you
execute this operation.
4Mute tracks.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key. The pitch of track 2 will
be raised three semitones.
Press the [EXIT] key to select SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC,
and access the Program page.
6Use the same procedure to raise the pitch three
semitones for each track on which performance
data is recorded. However, do not change the key
of track 1 which uses a drum kit.
Mute all tracks other than tracks 3 and 4. When you
play back, you will hear only the electric piano and
guitar performances.
If you change the key of a track that is using a
drum kit, the relationship between the notes and
the instruments of the drum kit will be shifted, so
that the rhythm instruments will not sound cor-
rectly.
5As described in steps 1–4, set song S001: VERSE
to 008 (8 measures), making it an eight measure
song.
About editing
Then mute all tracks other than tracks 1–3. When
you play back, you will hear only the drums, bass,
and electric piano.
Song editing
In addition to copying and renaming a song, other
operations such as Delete can be performed from the
Utility menu commands in pages such as SEQ 1.1:
Play/ REC (☞PG p.52).
6As described in steps 1–4, set song S002: CHO-
RUS to 008 (8 measures), making it an eight mea-
sure song.
Track editing
Event Editing allows you to edit or insert data in a
recorded track. In addition, commands such as Create
Control Data (which lets you insert bend, aftertouch,
or control change data) and other commands for delet-
ing, copying, inserting, or moving tracks can be
accessed from the Utility menu command in pages
such as SEQ 5.2: Track Edit (☞PG p.75).
4. Changing the key (transposing/ modu-
lating)
Here’s how to change the key of a song.
1Select song S002: CHORUS.
2Select the SEQ 5.2: Track Edit page.
3Use the [ ], [ ] keys to select track T02 for the
Pattern editing
key change.
Using the Utility menu commands of the SEQ 5.1:
RPPR, Pattern page, you can use event editing to mod-
ify the recorded data or insert new data, and execute
commands to delete, copy, or bounce patterns (☞PG
p.70).
4Specify the measures for which the key will be
changed.
Press the [ ] key to select “Measure (From),” and use
the VALUE controller to set this to 001. Next press the
[
] key to select “Measure (To End of),” and set this to
008.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4Set the last step to End.
Creating and playing a Cue List
If you set this to Continue to Step01, the cue list will
play back repeatedly.
A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succes-
sion. For example you can create a separate song for
each portion (introduction, melody A, melody B, cho-
rus, and ending) of a composition, and use the cue list
to specify the order of each portion and the number of
times that it will be repeated to complete the song.
If you want to change the structure of the song, the cue
list lets you do so in an efficient way.
5In “Rep (Repeat),” specify the number of times
that the song for that step will be repeated. For this
example, set Step 02 S001: VERSES to 02.
6Specify whether effect settings will also be
switched when the song at each step is played
back. If you want to effect settings to change,
check the “FX” check box.
You can also use this as a jukebox function that will
playback completed songs in the order you specify.
For this example, check the “FX” check box for Step
01, which loads the effects.
Cue List
7When you are finished making settings for each
Step
01
Song
S000: Intro
S001: A
Repeat
02
step, press the [F7] (“DONE”) key.
Intro
Intro
A
A
A
A
B
B
Chorus
02
02
8To play back at the tempo that was specified for
Chorus
Chorus Chorus
03 S002: B
01
each song, set “Tempo Mode” to Auto.
04 S003: Chorus
05 S001: A
02
A(Solo) Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending
02
If this is set to Manu (Manual), playback will use
06
07
08
01
S002: B
the tempo specified by “ꢀ =”.
S003: Chorus
02
Tempo Mode
S001: A (Solo) 01
09 S003: Chorus
10 S004: Ending
03
02
Each unit in a cue list is called a “step,” and each step
contains a song number and the number of repeats.
Rep(Repeat)
FX
Here we will use a cue list to combine the previously-
created songs S000: INTRO, S001: VERSES, and S002:
CHORUS.
9When you press the [START/STOP] key, playback
will begin from the step that is specified as the
“Current Step.”
1Select SEQ 2.1: Cue List.
Meter
With the default settings, song S000 will be selected
for “Step” 01, and End will be selected for “Step” 02.
Track
Select
Currently-
playing
step
Starting measure of that step
Current Step
•
“Step”: The arrow will indicate the currently
playing step. indicates the currently selected
“Step.” If you set “Current Step” while stopped,
the display will change.
2Press the [F7] (“EDIT”) key
You will be able to insert or delete songs into or
from the cue list.
•
•
“M****”: Indicates the starting measure of that step.
“Meter”: Indicates the currently-playing time
signature. This cannot be changed.
•
•
The name of a cue list can be specified by the
“Rename Cue List” page menu command.
When you play the keyboard, the program of the
track selected by “Track Select” will sound. If a
different program is selected for each song, the
program specified for the currently playing song
will sound.
Step
3Add a song to the Step area.
Use the cursor keys to select Step 02, and press the
[F4] (“INSERT”) key. A song will be added to step
02. Use the VALUE controller to select S001:
VERSES.
Cue list editing will automatically end if you press
the [START/ STOP] key, etc. (
→
)
In the same way, select Step 03, and press the [F4]
(“INSERT”) key to add a song to Step 03. Set this
step to S002: CHORUS.
If you press [F5] (“CUT”), the selected step will be
deleted. If you press the [F4] (“INSERT”) key, that
step will be inserted. If you press the [F6] (“COPY”)
key, the selected step will be copied. If you press the
[F4] (“INSERT”) key, that step will be inserted.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playback is not connected smoothly between
songs when playing a cue list
Depending on the effect settings, a certain amount of
time may be required for the effects to be switched. If
this occurs, the playback will not be smoothly con-
nected from song to song.
To ensure a smooth transition from song to song,
check “FX” for “Step” 01. Do not check “FX” for the
remaining steps. This way, the effect settings will be
made before playback begins, and there will be no time
lag when cue list playback is started or when switching
from song to song. Although it will not be possible to
change effect types within the cue list, you can use
dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as
Effect Control to control the effects within the cue list,
for example applying reverb more deeply on certain
songs, or raising the LFO speed for a specific song. We
recommend this method if you will be using a cue list
to construct the song.
Using a foot switch to switch the Step
You can use a foot switch to switch the Step.
If you set “Rep(Repeat)” to FS, a foot switch connected
to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack will control the tim-
ing at which the song stops repeating. Set “Foot SW
Assign” (GLOBAL 1.1: System, Foot page) to Cue
Repeat Control.
Converting a cue list to a song
Although it is not possible to record additional mate-
rial onto tracks in a cue list, you can convert a cue list
to a song, and then record solos etc. on vacant tracks.
You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you
wish to save it onto an SD card as SMF data.
1Select the Utility menu command “Convert to
Song”.
A dialog box will appear.
When you execute the Utility menu command “Con-
vert to Song”, the effect settings of the “Step” 01 song
will be specified for the song that results from the con-
version.
2In “To,” specify the destination song number for
the converted data.
The cue list name will automatically be assigned as
the song name of the converted data. (For details
and cautions regarding “Convert to Song,” refer to
PG p.60.)
Even if “FX” is not checked, there may be cases in
which a time lag in the transition between songs,
depending on the musical data of the song. Also, there
may be cases in which the musical data is not played at
the correct timing at the transition between songs. If
this occurs, you can edit the musical data of the song,
or convert the cue list to a song for playback. If you use
“Convert to Song” to convert the cue list to a song,
there will be no time lag during playback at the transi-
tion between songs, and the musical data will be
played at the correct timing.
If you wish to select a new song as the convert des-
tination, use the numeric keys [0]–[9] to specify the
song number, and then press the [ENTER] key. It is
not necessary to set “Set Length” in the dialog box
that appears at this time. The number of measures
in the converted song will be used. Press the [F8]
(“OK”) key, and the Convert Cue List dialog box
will appear.
Creating multiple songs for use in a cue list
If you want to create multiple songs for use in a cue
list, it is a good idea to make the various necessary set-
tings (program and other settings for each track, effect
settings, etc.) for one song (e.g., S000), and then use the
Utility menu command “Copy From Song” in SEQ 1.1
etc. to copy it to other songs so that the settings will be
consistent.
3Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
The cue list will be converted into a song. Access the
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC page, select the song number
that you specified as the conversion destination,
and check the results.
After your cue list is finished and you convert it
into a song, the track settings (program, pan, vol-
ume, etc.) of each step will be converted into play-
back data and will be reproduced, but if the MIDI
channel settings do not match, it may not be possi-
ble to convert the playback state of the cue list into
a song.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose “Pattern Select,” and press the [INC] key
once to select P122: HipHop 2/HipHop.
Creating and recording RPPR
(Realtime Pattern Play/ Record)
By using “REVERT” in this way, you can work
efficiently when the patterns to be assigned have
consecutive or nearby numbers, or use the same
track.
This section explains how to assign a pattern to RPPR,
and how to play and record. (☞“Playing with the
Creating RPPR data
Use the above method to assign several patterns
from the range of P123: HipHop 3/HipHop–P135:
HipHop 15/HipHop.
2Specify the program for each track.
For this example we will use a template song. Use
the Utility menu command “Load Template Song”
to load P14: Hip Hop/Rap. It is not necessary to
9Press the C#2 key.
The assigned pattern will play.
Take your finger off the C#2 key, and press the D2
key.
3Select the SEQ 5.1: RPPR, RPPR Setup page.
In this page, the RPPR function is automatically
turned on.
The pattern will change, and playback will begin. At
this time, the pattern operation will depend on the
“Sync” and “M (Mode)” setting.
Set “KEY” to C#2, and set “Sync” to Measure.
Make the same setting for D2.
Now press the notes consecutively. Notice that the
patterns operate in a different way.
With the “Measure” setting, patterns will be han-
dled in one-measure units. The second and subse-
quent patterns to be started will start in
4Use “KEY” to select the key to which the pattern
will be assigned.
Select C#2. This can also be selected by holding
down the [ENTER] key and playing a note.
synchronization with units of a measure relative to
the pattern that was started first.
C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback, and
If you change the “M (Mode)” setting to Once, the
entire pattern will playback to the end even if you
release your finger from the keyboard immediately.
cannot be assigned.
5Check the “Assign” check box.
6Set “Pat (Pattern Bank)” to the Pre pattern type,
and set “Pattern Select” to pattern P121: HipHop 1/
HipHop.
To stop playback, either press the same key once
again, or press the C2 or lower key.
7Set “Track” to T01: Drums.
For details on “Sync,” “M (Mode),” and “Shift,”
refer to PG p.73.
The selected pattern will be played according to the
settings (program, etc.) of the track you select here.
The assigned keys will be shown as a keyboard
graphic in the LCD screen.
8Assign patterns to other keys.
Set “KEY” to D2.
Unassigned keys can be used for normal keyboard
performance. Use “Track Select” to select the track
that will be played from the keyboard. For exam-
ple you might assign backing patterns such as
Press the [F4] (“REVERT”) key.
The settings for “Assign,” “Pat (Pattern Bank),”
“Pattern Select,” and “Track” will be set to the val-
ues that were specified earlier (in steps 5–7).
Song
RPPR function is on
RPPR
RPPR
Normal multi playback
and recording
P00: Pop&Balad 1/Std
U00: Pattern 00
Preset Pattern P00 - P149
User Pattern U00 - U99
5.1: RPPR, RPPR Setup
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
drums and bass to the C#2–B2 keys and use these
keys to control pattern playback, and use keys C3
and above to play solos in realtime. It is a good
idea to keep the assigned keys together in this
way.
Realtime-recording an RPPR perfor-
mance
An RPPR performance can be recorded in realtime. If
you are using only one track (T01: Drums) as in “Cre-
to T01: Drums, and use single track recording in
which only one track will be recorded.
RPPR playback
Let’s use the RPPR you created to perform in the SEQ
1.1: Play/ REC page.
Even if RPPR uses only one track, use multi-track
recording if you will be selecting another track in
“Track Select” and recording its performance at the
same time.
You should also select multi-track recording if you cre-
ated the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than
just a single track, and want to simultaneously record
the performance of multiple tracks.
1In Sequencer mode, select SEQ 1.1: Play/REC.
2Check the “RPPR” check box.
The RPPR function will be turned on. The on/ off
setting is memorized for each song.
The RPPR pattern will be recorded as performance
data on the tracks used by the pattern.
Here we will explain how you can simultaneously
record a performance that uses both RPPR and the
arpeggiator.
3Play the keyboard, and patterns will begin playing
according to the RPPR settings.
1For each RPPR pattern , set “Sync” to SEQ.
•
•
Pattern playback for a key with a “Sync” setting of
Beat or Measure will synchronize to the pattern
playback of the first key. (☞PG p.73 “Sync”)
With a setting of SEQ, patterns played by the RPPR
function while the sequencer is playing or recording
will start in synchronization with the measures of
the sequencer.
If you are playing the pattern in synchronization
(when “Sync” is Beat, Measure, or SEQ), the
pattern will start accurately if you play the note
slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or
measure. Even if you play the note slightly later
than the beat or measure (but no later than a 32nd
note), it will be considered to have started at the
beat or measure, and the beginning of the pattern
will be compressed so that the remainder of the
playback will be correct.
2We will use the arpeggiator to play the bass pat-
tern. Follow these settings.
Set “Track Select” to T02: Bass.
If you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an
external MIDI device, use the MIDI channel that is
selected for “Track Select.”
Select the SEQ 6.1: Arp., Setup page, and set the
track 2 “Assign” to A. (Make sure that A is checked
for “Arpeggiator Run.”)
4To turn off the RPPR function, uncheck the RPPR
check box.
Play RPPR while a song plays back
RPPR can be played in synchronization with the play-
back of a song.
Pattern playback for a key with a “Sync” setting of
SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song.
(☞PG p.73 “Sync”)
Select the SEQ 6.1: Arp., Arp. A page, and set “Pat-
tern” to U099 (INT).
Start song playback, and then press the key. The pat-
tern playback will start in synchronization with the
measures of the song.
Synchronization will be lost if you use the [
REW] or [FF
] keys while a song is playing.
Do not check “Key Sync.”
If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the
moment that song playback begins, it is a good
idea to insert an empty measure containing no
musical data before the song playback begins.
Press the [ARP ON/OFF] key. (The key will light.)
If the song is stopped, the pattern will synchronize
to the timing of the arpeggiator function.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3In the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Preference page, check
If you made a mistake during your performance or
would like to re-record, you can use the Compare
function (press the [COMPARE] key) to re-record as
many times as you wish.
the “Multi REC” check box.
9If you want to record other tracks, un-check the
“Multi REC” or “RPPR” check boxes as necessary.
In step 3, uncheck the “Multi REC” check box to
defeat multi-track recording.
If “Recording Mode” is set to Loop All Tracks,” it
will not be possible to select Multi REC. Set the
“Recording Mode” to Over Write.
In step 5, uncheck the “RPPR” check box to turn
off the RPPR function.
4Select the 1.1: Play/REC, Program page.
For all tracks, the “PLAY/MUTE/REC” indication
will show REC.
Recording the sound of a combi-
nation or program
The track played by RPPR will be recorded simulta-
neously with the track played by the arpeggiator.
Set “PLAY/MUTE/REC” to PLAY or MUTE for all
tracks other than tracks 1 and 2, which we will be
recording.
Here’s how you can easily copy the settings of a combi-
nation or program, and then record.
There are two ways to do this. While playing in Pro-
gram or Combination mode, you can use the Auto
Song Setup function to automatically set up a song
using the current settings of the program or combina-
tion. Or, you can use the page menu command in
Sequencer mode to copy the settings of a program or
combination into the sequencer.
Make sure that “Track Select” is set to T02: Bass.
Your keyboard playing on keys not assigned to the
RPPR function can be recorded on the track speci-
fied by “Track Select.”
Auto Song Setup function
5In the 1.1: Play/REC, Play/REC page, make sure
The Auto Song Setup function automatically applies
the settings stored with the current program or combi-
nation to a new song in the TR sequencer. This allows
you to capture your creative moments and perfor-
mances without having to manually set any of the
sequencer parameters.
that the “RPPR” check box is checked.
As an example, here’s how to use the Auto Song Setup
function in Combination mode.
6Press the [LOCATE] key to set the location to
1Enter Combination mode.
001:01.000.
7Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
[START/STOP] key.
Press a key that plays an RPPR pattern, and one or
more keys that play the arpeggiator.
If you press a key during the pre-count before
recording, the pattern playback and arpeggio per-
formance will begin simultaneously when recording
begins, and will be recorded.
2In the COMBI 1.1: Play, Prog page, select the
desired combination. You can use the COMBI 1.1:
Play, Mix page to edit the pan and volume of each
timbre, and the COMBI 1.1: Play, Arp.A/Arp.B
page to edit the arpeggiator settings. When you are
finished editing, execute “Update Combination”
or “Write Combination” if you want to save your
edits.
Record the RPPR pattern playback and arpeggio
performance.
When recording the playback of patterns triggered
by RPPR, the timing of the recorded events may be
slightly skewed. If this occurs, try setting “Reso”
(Realtime Quantize Resolution) to a setting other
than Hi.
This operation will use the settings that are stored
with the current Program or Combination. So, if
you want to use the arpeggiator when you record,
you will need to save the Program or Combination
with the arpeggiator function switched on before
you proceed.
8When you are finished performing, press the
[START/STOP] key.
Recording will end, and the sequencer will return to
the location at which recording began.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Hold down the [ENTER] key and press the [REC/
2Execute the Utility menu command “Copy From
WRITE] key.
Combination.”
The “Setup to Record” dialog box will appear.
A dialog box will appear.
4Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to execute Auto Song
Setup, or press the [F7] (“Cancel”) key if you
decide not to execute.
Select the combination that you want to copy (i.e.,
the copy source).
Press the COMBI BANK [B] key, then press numeric
keys [9], [9], and finally press the [ENTER] key.
B099: Steely Keys will be selected.
We will copy the effect settings of the combination
as well, so check the “With Effects” check box.
Since we want to copy the settings of the combina-
tion’s eight timbres to tracks 1–8, select Track 1 to 8.
Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to execute the copy.
When you execute Auto Song Setup, the TR will
automatically enter the Sequencer mode, and the
settings of the previously selected program or com-
bination will be applied to the song. The first
unused song will be selected as the song.
Combination settings that are automatically set
The settings that are automatically made when you
execute the Auto Song Setup command are the same
as if you execute the “Copy From Combi” (☞PG
p.52) utility menu command after making the fol-
lowing settings in the dialog box.
3In the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Preference page, check
•
•
•
Check “with Effects”
Set “To” to Track 1 to 8
Check “Auto adjust Arp for Multi REC”
Program settings that are automatically set
If you execute Auto Song Setup from Program
mode, the program will be selected for track 1, and
the following settings will be made.
When you perform multi-track recording, the multi-
ple channels that are being sounded by the arpeg-
giator will be recorded simultaneously.
•
Insert effect, master effect, and master EQ
settings of the program
4Set the tracks not being recorded (i.e., tracks 9–16)
•
•
Arpeggiator settings of the program
Controller Setup (2.2: Ed-Ctrl) settings of the
program
5Set “Track Select” to 01.
In order to play the sounds and arpeggiator in the
same way as in Combination mode, set “Track
Select” to the track that matches the global MIDI
channel. When you play the keyboard, the sounds
will be heard just as in Combination mode.
5The TR will automatically enter record-ready
mode, and the metronome will sound according to
the Sequencer mode Pref. (Preference) settings
(☞PG p.56).
6Press the [START/STOP] key to begin realtime
recording. When you are finished recording, press
6Begin recording.
Press the [LOCATE] key to set the location to
001:01.000.
Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
[START/STOP] key.
If you play a B3 note or lower during the pre-count
before recording, the arpeggio pattern will start
from the beginning at the moment that recording
begins. Record your performance.
Copy From Combi (Sequencer mode
page menu commands)
Here’s how to use the Copy From Combi page menu
commands in Sequencer mode.
7When you are finished performing, press the
[START/STOP] key.
Make sure that the global MIDI channel (GLOBAL
2.1: MIDI, “MIDI Channel”) is set to 01.
If you made a mistake or want to re-record, you can
use the Compare function (press the [COMPARE]
key) to re-record as many times as you want. (The
“MultiREC” check box will be unchecked when you
use Compare, so you will need to check it again.)
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*2
Correction is necessary only if the tracks operated by a sin-
gle arpeggiator are using only “MIDI Channel” 01. In
some cases, correction may also be necessary if the two
arpeggiators use the same MIDI channel.
If the recorded performance is not reproduced cor-
rectly during playback
If you use the Utility menu command “Copy From
Combination” to copy the settings of a combination,
and then perform multi-track recording with the
arpeggiator turned on, there may be cases in which the
performance during recording is not reproduced by
the playback.
Depending on the combination settings, it may
also be necessary to change the track settings as
well.
In the screens shown above, combination B071: “In
the Pocket” has been copied using “Copy From Com-
bination.” As described in steps 1and 2of the proce-
dure given earlier, try actually copying this to see for
yourself. For the arpeggiator settings of this combina-
determine whether correction is necessary, and if nec-
essary, what needs to be corrected.
Multiple tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel
are combined into a single stream of performance data
during recording. If there is a track with the same MIDI
channel as the track being played by the arpeggiator,
the data played by the arpeggiator will be combined
with the performance data that was played manually,
and all of this data will be sounded by each track of the
same channel (if “Status” is INT).
In such cases, you can solve the problem by changing
the MIDI channel of the track that is played by the
arpeggiator, and then creating a track that will drive
the arpeggiator.
“Arpeggiator Run” A and B are checked, and “MIDI
Channel” 01 and 02 are selected. Corrections must be
made. Correction is necessary for one of the arpeggia-
tors. If you perform multi-track recording with these
settings, the MIDI channels of T01, 02, 03, 04, 05, and 06
are the same, so the low-register bass (T01 and T02),
the high-register synth brass/ pad (T03, T04 and T06),
and the synth mallet played by arpeggiator B (T05) will
have their performance data combined into one
stream, and the performance will not be reproduced at
playback. (T08 is a dummy track used to trigger arpeg-
giator A.)
If the recorded performance is not reproduced by the
playback, check the following conditions.
•
SEQ 6.1: Arp., Setup page
“Arpeggiator Run” A, B, and “Assign” settings
1So that the synth mallet played by arpeggiator A
can be recorded separately, change the MIDI chan-
nel of T05.
Select the SEQ 3.1: Param1, MIDI T01-08 page, and
change the T05 “MIDI Channel” to 03.
•
SEQ 3.1: Param1, MIDI page “MIDI Channel” settings
2Add settings for triggering arpeggiator A.
Select the SEQ 3.1: Param1, MIDI T09-10 page, and
for track 9 (or any unused track), turn “Status” Off,
and set the “MIDI Channel” to 01.
(T09 will be a dummy track used to trigger arpeg-
giator B.)
If “Arpeggiator Run” A and B are checked, and the
arpeggiator is assigned to a track, make sure that
“MIDI Channel” is set to other than 01.
3Select the SEQ 6.1: Arp., Setup T09-16 page. Set the
track 9 Assign to B.
Make sure that the global MIDI channel (GLOBAL
2.1: MIDI, “MIDI Channel”) is set to 01.
This will produce the following settings.
Track
T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 T09
Off Off Off Off Off
INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Off Off
01 01 01 03 01 02 01 01
Arpeggiator Run MIDI Channel *1
Correction
Assign
Status
B
A
A
B
If either “A” or “B”
are checked
01 only
Correction required
MIDI Ch. 01
01 02, 01 03, etc. No correction required
01 only Correction required
If both “A” and “B”
are checked
This completes the corrections. In the SEQ 1.1: Play/
REC, Preference page, set “Track Select” to any
track whose MIDI channel is 01. Check the “Multi
REC” check box and perform multi-track recording.
01 02, 01 03, etc. Correction required for
only one
01 02 03, etc.
No correction required/
Correction required *2
*1
If the “MIDI Channel” of multiple tracks operated by the
arpeggiator is set only to 01, refer to the lines for “01 only.”
If the “MIDI Channel” settings are 01 and one other chan-
nel, such as 01 and 02, or 01 and 03, then refer to the lines
for “01 02, 01 03 etc.” If the “MIDI Channel” settings are 01
and multiple other MIDI channels, such as 01 and 02 and
03, then refer to the line for “01 02 03, etc.”
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations for which Compare is not available
•
•
Editing song parameters
Caution and other functions in
Sequencer mode
Utility menu commands other than those listed
above (in Operations for which Compare is
available)
TR song data and its compatibility
The following two types of song data can be loaded
from SD card into this instrument’s sequencer.
Memory Protect
Before you record a track or pattern, or edit the musical
data, you will need to turn off the memory protect set-
•
Song data saved in this instrument’s own format
This data is only for this instrument. However, it is
partially compatible with the TRITON/ TRITON-
pro/ TRITONproX/ TRITON-Rack (Multi)/ TRI-
TON Le/ TRITON STUDIO/ TRITON Extreme and
KARMA Music Workstation (☞PG p.250). It cannot
be loaded into other instruments.
About MIDI
Track status “status”
You can make settings for this instrument’s sequencer
to specify whether it will sound the internal tone gen-
erator or an external tone generator.
Since the performance will be faithfully reproduced,
including detailed settings of this instrument, you
should use this format to save song data that is
intended for playback on this instrument.
When Track Status “Status” (3.1: Param1, MIDI..8,
MIDI..16) is set to INT, operating this instrument’s
keyboard and controllers will sound and control this
instrument’s own tone generator.
When “Status” is set to EXT, EX2 or BTH, operating
this instrument’s keyboard and controllers will sound
and control the external tone generator. (The MIDI
channel of the external tone generator must match the
“MIDI Channel” of the track that is set to EXT, EX2 or
BTH.) With a setting of BTH, both the external tone
generator and this instrument’s tone generator will
sound and be controlled.
•
Standard MIDI Files
This format is not able to provide a totally faithful
reproduction of the performance on this instrument
in the way that this instrument’s own format does
(although there will be no problem for normal play-
back), but does provide compatibility with other
SMF-compatible devices.
To load song data from SD card or save song data to SD
The Compare function
When you perform realtime recording, step recording,
or track editing, this function allows you to make
before-and-after comparisons.
If you continue editing when the [COMPARE] key
is lit, the key will go dark. This now becomes the
musical data that will be selected when the [COM-
PARE] key is dark.
If you wish to use the Sequencer mode of the instru-
ment as a 16-track multi-timbral tone generator, select
INT or BTH. (☞PG p.62 “Status”)
Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI
device
The record/ playback tempo of this instrument’s
sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI
device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine (☞PG
p.242).
Operations for which Compare is available
•
•
Recording to a track
Track Edit
All commands except for the Utility menu com-
mands “Memory Status” and “Rename Track” of
the SEQ 5.2: Track Edit page.
•
•
Recording to a pattern
Pattern Edit
All commands except for the Utility menu com-
mands “Memory Status,” “Rename Pattern,” “FF/
REW Speed,” and “Rename Track” of the SEQ 5.1:
RPPR, Pattern page.
•
Song Edit
SEQ 1.1-4.4 and 6.1–6.4 pages: Utility menu com-
mands “Delete Song” and “Copy From Song”
SEQ 2.1: Cue List page: Page menu commands
“Convert to Song” and “Copy Song”
In general, track and pattern event data can not be
returned to its original state.
Comparing song parameters is possible only during
song editing (when executing a Utility menu com-
mand).
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
to record.
Recording on the TR
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Over Write. (SEQ 1.1:
The process by which your playing on this instru-
ment’s keyboard and controllers is captured on the
tracks or patterns of a song as data is called “record-
ing.”
Play/REC, Preference page REC Setup)
Recording a track,
and recording a pattern
3In “Location,” specify the location at which you
wish to begin recording.
4Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
Recording a track
[START/STOP] key.
There are two ways to record to a track: realtime
recording and step recording. You can choose from a
further six types of realtime recording.
If “Metronome Setup” has the default settings, the
metronome will sound for a two-measure pre-
count, and then recording will begin.
Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the
joystick to record your performance.
In addition, you can use event editing to modify data
that has been recorded or to insert data, and use track
editing operations such as Create Control Data to
insert data such as bend, after touch, and control
changes.
5When you finish playing, press the [START/STOP]
key.
Recording will end, and the location will return to
the point at which you begin recording.
Recording a pattern
There are two ways to record a pattern: realtime
recording and step recording. For realtime recording,
only one recording type (loop) is available.
At this time if you press the [PAUSE] key instead of
the [START/ STOP] key, recording will pause. When
you press the [PAUSE] once again, recording will
resume. When you are finished, press the [START/
STOP] key to stop recording.
In addition, you can use event edit operations to mod-
ify data that has been recorded or to insert data.
The Utility menu command “Get From Track” can be
used to take musical data from a desired area of a
track, and use it as the musical data for a pattern. Con-
versely, the Utility menu commands “Put to Track”
and “Copy to Track” can be used to place or to copy
the musical data of a pattern in a track.
• Overdub
With this method, the newly recorded musical data
is added to the existing data.
When you perform overdub recording on a previ-
ously-recorded track, the newly recorded data will
be added to the previously-recorded data.
It is best to select this method when you wish to add
control data, or to record tempo data onto the mas-
ter track. This lets you record data without erasing
the existing data.
Realtime recording
This is a method of recording in which your playing on
the keyboard and your operations of controllers such
as the joystick are recorded in realtime.
This method of recording is normally used one track at
a time, and is called single track recording.
As an alternative, multitrack recording allows you to
simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto
multiple tracks. This is the method you will use when
using the RPPR function and the arpeggiator function
to record multiple tracks of musical data at once, or
when you playback existing sequence data on an exter-
nal sequencer and record it onto this instrument’s
1Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
to record.
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Over Dub. (SEQ 1.1:
Play/REC, Preference page REC Setup)
3For the rest of the procedure, refer to steps 3–5of
“Overwrite.”
• Overwrite
With this method, the musical data previously
recorded on a track is overwritten by the newly
recorded data. When you perform overwrite record-
ing on a previously-recorded track, its musical data
will be replaced by the newly recorded data.
Normally you will use this method to record, and
then modify the results by using other types of real-
time recording or event editing.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4In “Location,” specify a location several measures
earlier than the point at which you wish to begin
recording.
• Manual punch-in
While the song is playing, you can press the [REC/
WRITE] key or a connected pedal switch at the
desired location to start or stop recording.
5Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
With this method, the musical data previously on
the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data.
[START/STOP] key.
When you reach the starting location you specified
in step 3, recording will begin. Play the keyboard
and operate controllers such as the joystick to record
your performance. When you reach the ending loca-
tion you specified in step 3, recording will end.
(Playback will continue.)
1Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
to record.
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Manual Punch In.
(SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Preference page REC Setup)
6Press the [START/STOP] key.
Playback will stop, and you will return to the loca-
tion you specified in step 4.
• Loop All Tracks
3In “Location,” specify a location several measures
earlier than the point at which you wish to begin
recording.
This method lets you continue recording as you add
musical data.
The specified region can be recorded repeatedly.
This is ideal when recording drum phrases, etc.
4Press the [START/STOP] key.
1Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
Playback will begin.
to record.
5At the point at which you wish to begin recording,
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Loop All Tracks.
press the [REC/WRITE] key.
(SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Preference page REC Setup)
Recording will begin.
Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as
the joystick to record your performance.
If “Multi REC” is checked, it will not be possible to
select Loop All Tracks.
6When you finish recording, press the [REC/
WRITE] key.
Recording will end (playback will continue).
Instead of pressing the [REC/WRITE] key in steps
5and 6, you can use a foot switch connected to
the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack. Set the GLOBAL
1.1: System, Foot page “Foot SW Assign” to Song
3In “Loop Start Meas, “Loop End Meas” specify the
area that you wish to record.
For example if you specify M004–M008, recording
will occur repeatedly (as a loop) from measure 4 to
measure 8.
7Press the [START/STOP] key.
Playback will stop, and you will return to the loca-
tion that you specified in step 3.
4In “Location,” specify a location several measures
earlier than the point at which you wish to begin
recording.
• Auto punch-in
5Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
First you must specify the area that will be re-
recorded. Then recording will occur automatically
at the specified area.
With this method, the musical data previously on
the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data.
[START/STOP] key.
Playback will begin. When you reach the starting
location you specified in step 3, recording will
begin. Play the keyboard and operate controllers
such as the joystick to record your performance.
1Use “Track Select” to select the track that you want
to record.
When you reach the ending location you specified
in step 3, you will return to the starting location,
and continue recording.
2Set the “Recording Mode” to Auto Punch In. (SEQ
1.1: Play/REC, Preference page REC Setup)
The musical data that is loop-recorded will be
added to the previously-recorded data.
6You can also erase specific data even while you
continue loop recording.
If you press the [REC/WRITE] key during loop
recording, all musical will be removed from the cur-
rently selected track as long as you continue press-
ing the key.
3In “Auto P Start Meas, “Auto P End Meas” specify
the area that you wish to record.
For example if you specify M005–M008, recording
will occur only from measure 5 to measure 8.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By checking the “Remove Data” check box you can 5In SEQ 3.1: Param1, MIDI page “MIDI Channel,”
erase only the specified data. During loop record-
ing, press the note that you wish to delete, and only
the data of that note number will be deleted from
the keyboard as long as you continue pressing that
note.
specify the MIDI channel for each track.
The specified channel of musical data will be
recorded on that track. It is a good idea to set tracks
1–16 to MIDI channels 1–16. (This is the default set-
ting.) Also make sure that “Status” is set either to
INT or BTH.
Similarly, bender data will be deleted as long as you
tilt the joystick in the X (horizontal) direction, and
after touch data will be deleted as long as you apply
pressure to the keyboard.
6Press the [LOCATE] key to set the location to
001:01.000.
7Press the [REC/WRITE] key to enter recording-
When you are once again ready to record musical
data, uncheck the “Remove Data” check box.
standby mode.
8Start the external sequencer.
7Press the [START/STOP] key.
The TR’sequencer will receive the MIDI Start mes-
sage transmitted by the external sequencer, and will
automatically begin recording.
Playback will end, and you will return to the record-
ing start location that you specified in step 4.
If Loop All Tracks is selected, normal playback will
be looped as well.
9When the song ends, stop the external sequencer.
This instrument’s sequencer will receive the MIDI
Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer,
and will automatically stop recording. You can also
press the [START/ STOP] key on this instrument
itself to stop recording.
• Multi (multitrack recording)
Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously
record onto multiple tracks, each with a different
channel. This method can be used with overwrite,
overdub, manual punch-in, and auto punch-in
recording.
0Playback.
In the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI page, set “MIDI Clock”
to Internal.
Set “Tempo Mode” to Auto.
When you press the [START/STOP] key, playback
will begin.
Using the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks
simultaneously
A multi-track performance using the arpeggiator
function can be recorded simultaneously using
If the correct sounds do not play immediately after
playback is started, you may be able to solve the
problem by using the Utility menu command
“Event Edit” (SEQ 5.2: Track Edit) to edit the Pro-
gram Change data.
When simultaneously recording multiple tracks
using the RPPR function
You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously
record the playback of multiple tracks that are being
triggered by the RPPR function. For the procedure,
When simultaneously recording multiple tracks of
MIDI data from an external sequencer, etc.
1Make sure that the TR’s MIDI IN and the external
sequencer’s MIDI OUT are connected by a MIDI
cable.
If they are not connected, turn off the power, make
the connection, and then turn the power back on
again. (☞PG p.233)
2Set the MIDI Clock (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, MIDI
page “MIDI Clock”) to External or Ext-USB, so
that this instrument will synchronize to the MIDI
clock of the external sequencer (☞PG p.129).
3Create a new song, and in the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC,
Preference page, check the “Multi REC” check
box. Set the “Recording Mode” to Over Write.
4Select the SEQ 1.1: Play/REC, Program page.
For the tracks that you are not recording, set “PLAY/
MUTE/REC” to PLAY or MUTE.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A dialog box will appear.
Step recording
This is a method of recording where you specify the
note timing, note length, and velocity etc. in the LCD
screen, and use the keyboard to input the pitches.
Only note-on/ off data can be recorded with this
method.
6Set the number of measures in the pattern to a
“Length” of 04 (four measures), and set “Meter” to
a time signature of 4/4. Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
7Set the “Resolution.” For this example, select ꢁ
(16th note).
Event Edit and Create Control Data
8Begin realtime recording.
Note data is the only type of data that can be recorded
in step recording. However there are ways to record
other types of data, aside from the realtime mode. You
can use the Event Edit and Create Control Data func-
tions.
You can record in the same way as you did when
Press the [REC/WRITE] key, and then press the
[START/STOP] key.
Event Edit is intended as a way to edit previously-
recorded data, but you can also use it to modify pro-
gram numbers or insert control changes.
After the pre-count, pattern recording will begin.
Play the keyboard and operate the joystick and
other controllers to record your performance.
When you reach the end of the pattern, you will
return to the beginning of the pattern and continue
recording. If you continue recording, the newly
recorded data will be added to the previously-
recorded data.
Create Control Data is a function that lets you create
and insert controller data that changes smoothly
between two specified values over the specified length
of time. This is used to input bend, after touch, and
control change data etc.
9If you want to delete specific data while you con-
tinue pattern recording, you can press the [REC/
WRITE] key or check the “Remove Data” check
box.
Realtime-recording to a pattern
Here’s how you can use realtime recording to create a
pattern. User patterns can be accessed by the RPPR
function in the same way as preset patterns, and can
be copied to or placed in a song. Playback data from a
track can also be copied to a pattern.
For details refer to step 6of “Loop All Tracks”
0Press the [START/STOP] key to stop recording.
If you made a mistake or decide to re-record, press
the [START/ STOP] key to stop recording, and press
the [COMPARE] key.
Before you begin recording a pattern, turn off the
When realtime-recording a pattern, a pattern of the
specified number of measures will playback repeat-
edly, allowing you to continue adding musical data to
it.
Using the arpeggiator for pattern recording
If the arpeggiator is set to operate for the track that is
selected for “Track Select,” you can turn on the [ARP
ON/ OFF] key and record the performance of the
arpeggiator into the pattern.
1Create a new song, and load the template song
2Access the SEQ 5.1: RPPR, Pattern page.
For details on arpeggiator settings, refer to p.76 and PG
p.82.
3For “Track Select,” select track T02: Bass.
4Set “Pattern Bank” to User, and set “Pattern
Select” to U00.
User patterns U00–U99 can be created for each song.
5Select the Utility menu command “Pattern
Param.”.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control data in pattern recording
To record control data in a pattern, you should
restore the control data to its normal value within
the pattern. If you fail to restore the normal value,
unnecessary control data may remain in a “stuck”
position when you place the pattern in a song or
use the RPPR function to play the pattern. How-
ever, the following control data will be automati-
cally reset to the following values when the song
or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern, or
when playback is halted.
Controller
Reset value
00 (zero)
Modulation 1 (CC#01)
Modulation 2 (CC#02)
Expression (CC#11)
00 (zero)
127 (max)
64 (center)
00 (zero)
Ribbon controller (CC#16)
Damper switch (CC#64)
Sostenuto switch (CC#66)
Soft switch (CC#67)
00 (zero)
00 (zero)
EG sustain level (CC#70)
Resonance level (CC#71)
EG release time (CC#72)
EG attack time (CC#73)
Low pass filter cutoff (CC#74)
EG decay time (CC#75)
LFO1 speed (CC#76)
LFO1 depth (pitch) (CC#77)
LFO1 delay (CC#78)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
64 (center)
00 (zero)
Filter EG intensity (CC#79)
SW1 modulation (CC#80)
SW2 modulation (CC#81)
Channel after touch
00 (zero)
00 (zero)
Pitch bender
00 (zero)
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sampling mode
The separately sold EXB-SMPL option can be installed
Time Slice
in the TR to add high-performance mono/ stereo sam-
pling functionality.
This automatically detects the attack portions of a
kick or snare etc. in a rhythm loop sample (a looped
pattern of drums etc.), and divides it into separate
rhythm instrument sounds. A pattern correspond-
ing to the divided samples is created automatically,
so that you can immediately use the Sequencer
mode RPPR function to play the pattern and adjust
the tempo without changing the pitch. You can also
do things such as adjusting the pitch of only the
snare, replacing it with a different sample, or chang-
ing the playback timing on the sequencer, in this
way creating a new rhythm loop based on the
rhythm loop you started with. (Stereo samples are
supported.)
Features of EXB-SMPL
•
•
48 kHz 16 bit linear mono/stereo sampling.
The EXB-SMPL includes a 16 Mbyte 72 pin SIMM
sample data (waveform data) memory module.
When this memory is installed in the TR, you can
sample for approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds in
monaural, or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds in
stereo. By installing 72 pin SIMM modules, you can
expand the memory to a maximum of 64 Mbytes,
which will allow you to record up to four 2 minute
54 second samples in mono (or four 1 minute 27
second samples in stereo), for a maximum total of
approximately 11 minutes 39 seconds of sampling
time (approximately 5 minutes 49 seconds in
stereo). (For details on expansion, refer to PG
p.260.)
Time Stretch
This lets you modify the tempo without changing
the pitch of a sample. You can select either Sustain-
ing (suitable for sustain-type instruments such as
strings or vocals), or Slice (suitable for rhythm
loops on decay-type instruments such drums). Ste-
reo samples are supported.
•
•
•
A maximum of 1,000 multisamples and 4,000
samples can be created.
In Media mode you can load multisample/ sample
data from an SD card or SCSI media.
Crossfade Loop
An important looping tool that helps smooth out
irregularities in long loops which contain complex
material. By executing Crossfade Loop, you can
eliminate this problem and create natural-sounding
loops.
Korg format or Akai (S1000/ 3000 samples, mapped
multisamples only) format sample data, and AIFF
or WAVE format sample data can be loaded. (Once
data has been loaded into the TR, it will all be
treated as Korg format sample data.)
Sample data created on the TR can be exported (out-
put) as an AIFF or WAVE format sample file.
The external audio source that you are sampling
can be processed by the one insertion effect to
apply effects such as a compressor or EQ. The LFO
frequency or delay time of the effect can be
specified as a BPM value, which is highly effective
when sampling phrase loops etc.
Link (with Crossfade)
This allows you to join two samples into a single
sample. You can also crossfade the overlapping por-
tion of the samples at this time, so that the volume
changes gradually, producing a natural-sounding
transition.
•
•
•
•
•
The BPM Adjust function (playback pitch adjust)
lets you adjust the playback pitch of each index so
that the loop frequency matches the desired BPM
value.
Start, loop start, and end addresses can be specified
in units of a single sample. Loop tune, reverse
playback, and loop lock functions are also
supported.
The Use Zero function automatically searches for
zero-cross points, making it easy to find the
beginning or end of the waveform, or locations that
will not produce noise when the sample is played
back.
The grid function displays a BPM-based grid on
the waveform display, helping you to create loops
or make waveform edits that match the desired
BPM.
Each multisample allows you to create up to 128
indices. Each index consists of a sample
assignment, a key zone, an original key, a playback
pitch, and settings such as level.
The “Keyboard & Index” display lets you edit a
multisample while viewing the assignments and
zones of each sample.
Both auto sampling and manual sampling can be
performed. With auto sampling, recording will
begin automatically when the input level exceeds a
specified threshold. In either method of sampling,
you can make pre-trigger settings.
•
•
The audio input supports both mic and line level
signals.
Datayou sampled can beplayed immediatelyfrom the
keyboard of the TR or by pressing the [AUDITION]
key. It is also easy to convert sampled data into a
program, and use it as material for the TR’s HI
synthesis system. Multisamples/ samples that have
been converted into a program can be used in a
combination or song.
The waveform can be viewed in the LCD screen,
and edited by a variety of waveform editing
commands that include rate convert (down-
sampling) and reverse playback.
•
•
•
•
The following commands are also provided.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Sample names and multisample names of up to 16
characters can be assigned. Sample names and
multisample names can also be viewed in Media
mode (☞PG p.143 “Translation”).
The “fixed intervals” mentioned above are generally
expressed as the “sampling frequency.” 48 kHz (kilo-
hertz) means that sampling is performed 48,000 times
each second, and that the interval is 1 (second)/ 48,000
(times) = approximately 0.00002083 (seconds) =
approximately 0.02083 mS (millisecond).
The higher the sampling frequency is, the closer to the
original analog signal the waveform in memory will
be.
How Sampling mode is organized
Each level is read, and converted into digital data. The
accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolu-
tion. This process converts an analog signal with infi-
nite resolution into a digital signal with finite
resolution. With 16 bit resolution, each level is indi-
cated in 65,536 steps (the sixteenth power of two).
The greater the bit resolution is, the closer to the origi-
nal analog signal the waveform in memory will be.
In Sampling mode
•
An external audio signal from an external audio
device or microphone connected to the AUDIO
INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is passed through an analog/
digital convertor, and recorded (sampled).
You can edit the waveform and loop settings etc. of
sample data that you sampled or that you loaded
from an SD card, CD-ROM etc., in Media mode.
You can assign samples to the keyboard to create a
multisample. These samples and multisamples can
be easily converted to a program using the Utility
menu command “Conv. To Program,” and these
programs can be used immediately in a
•
•
48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as in audio
devices such as DAT. A CD uses 44.1 kHz 16 bit sam-
pling, which is a slightly lower sampling frequency.
combination or a song.
Samples and Multisamples
Samples
Sampling frequency and bit resolution
The data that is recorded (sampled) into internal mem-
ory or loaded from a file is referred to as a sample or
sample file. Samples consist of the actual waveform
data, and parameters that specify how the data will be
played back, such as Start, Loop Start, and End
Address. Samples can be used in multisamples and
drum kits.
As shown in the diagram, sampling reads the level of
the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis,
and stores the levels in memory as digital data.
Level
Analog waveform
Time
The TR can hold a maximum of 4,000 samples in its
internal memory.
The TR can share a single waveform among multi-
ple samples. This allows you to create multiple
samples with different playback addresses from
the same waveform without wasting internal
memory. For example, suppose that you have
waveform data that records a voice saying “One-
Two-Three.” This single piece of waveform data
could be shared by three samples, with the play-
48kHz
Level
= 48,000 times every second
= 0.0208 mS cycle
16bit
=65,536 levels
of data
Sampled digital
waveform
Time
RAM (SIMM memory):
Expandable to 64 MB
Insert Effect
Digital/analog
convertor
AUDIO OUTPUT
jack
Analog/digital
convertor
AUDIO INPUT jack
Analog signal
Sample 0000 ... 3999
DAC
ADC
Digital signal
Analog signal
Digital signal
Used by combinations
and songs
Program
Multisample 000 ... 999
RAM (internal memory)
SD card, SCSI media (Media mode)
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back of sample A producing “One-Two-Three,”
sample B producing “One-Two,” and sample C
producing “Two-Three.” (☞PG p.96).
Sampling
The multisample and sample data in the Sampling
Multisamples
mode is not backed up when the power is turned
off. If you wish to keep this data, you must save it
onto an SD card or external SCSI device before
turning off the power.
After the power is first turned on, memory will not
contain any multisample or sample data. You must
first load previously-saved data before you can
playback or edit any sample data.
A multisample consists of settings that make one or
more samples sound in different areas of the keyboard.
A multisample consist of between one and 128
“indexes.” Each index contains parameters that specify
the sample that will playback, the zone for which it
will playback, the original pitch key, the playback
pitch, and level etc.
Using multisamples
Preparations for sampling
When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a
wide range of pitches, such as a piano, recording just
one sample and using it (playing it back) over the
entire pitch range will not produce a natural-sounding
result. By using a multisample you can record separate
samples for each pitch range, and assign these samples
to their respective pitch ranges to avoid any unnatural
sounds during playback. For example, you might
record one sample per octave, and assign each of these
samples to an index (keyboard area). All of the instru-
mental sounds in the TR’s internal preset multisamples
are constructed in this way.
Connections and settings for a monaural
source
When sampling in monaural from a mic, the output of
an external audio device or mixer, or an instrumental
sound such as guitar or synthesizer, connect the source
to the AUDIO INPUT 1 or 2.
Guitars and other instruments with active pickups
can be input directly, but instruments with passive
pickups (i.e., without internal preamps) cannot be
recorded at an appropriate level, due to imped-
ance mismatching. When connecting such instru-
ments, use a preamp or effect device.
By assigning multiple samples such as phrase samples
or rhythm loops to a multisample and arranging them
across the keyboard, you can play multiple samples
simultaneously. Since a different phrase could be
assigned to each key, you can perform just as though
you were using a pad-type sampler. Alternatively,
these samples could be assigned at one-octave inter-
vals, and played as phrase variations with different
playback pitches.
EXB-SMPL
MIC
The TR can hold a maximum of 1,000 multisamples in
its internal memory.
1Connect the mic or external audio device to the
A multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a
program, and played as a program. In a combination,
they can be combined with preset programs, and used
in a multi. They can be used with the arpeggiator to
produce interesting results (for example, by using the
arpeggiator to automatically play sound effects or spo-
ken samples).
AUDIO INPUT 1 jack.
2Set the AUDIO INPUT [MIC/LINE] switch to
match the input source. For input sources with a
low input level, such as a microphone, select the
MIC position. For other sources, select the LINE
position.
The AUDIO INPUT [MIC/ LINE] switch affects
both the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks.
Multisample
Index001
Top Key
Index003
Top Key
Index002
Top Key
Index004
Top Key
3The [LEVEL] knob will be adjusted later. For now,
set it near the center.
4In Sampling mode 1.1: Recording, select the Input/
Pref page.
Index 001
0000:
Index 002
Index 003
Index 004
0001:
0002:
0003:
Sample A
Sample B
Sample C
Sample D
Multisample
Sample
Program OSC (Single/Double)
Program OSC (Drums)
5In “Input 1,” set the various parameters that spec-
ify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks
will be received by the TR.
Drum Kit
•
“Lvl” adjusts the volume. Normally you will set
this to 127.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
“Pan” adjust the panning. For this example set it to
L000.
Set “BUS.” If you wish to use the TR’s insert effect
to process the incoming sound, select IFX here. For
this example, select L/R. The input sound will be
sampled just as it is.
4Use the [LEVEL] knob to adjust a suitable input
The [LEVEL] knob adjusts both AUDIO INPUT 1
and 2.
Using an insert effect
Be aware that when you change the setting from
Off to L/R or IFX, the volume level in the AUDIO
OUTPUT L/ MONO and R jacks and in the head-
phones may rise excessively.
The TR’s insert effect can be applied to the sound that
is being input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks,
allowing you to record a sample with effects applied.
As an example, we will explain the procedure for
applying an insert effect to a stereo source and sam-
pling the result.
“Input 1” controls the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack, and
“Input 2” controls the AUDIO INPUT 2 jack.
The settings above will cause the sound from the
AUDIO INPUT 1 jack to be output from the
AUDIO OUTPUT L/ MONO jack and from the L
channel of the headphones.
1Make the settings of step 1and 2in “Connec-
tions and settings for a stereo source.”
2Set the various “Input 1” and “Input 2” parame-
ters.
6Use the [LEVEL] knob to set an appropriate level.
•
•
Set “BUS” to IFX for both Input 1 and 2.
Set “Lvl” and “Pan” to the same settings as in step
3of “Connections and settings for a stereo
source.” With these settings, the stereo source will
be sent to insert effect (IFX).
If an overload occurs in the input stage of the TR,
“ADC OVER!” (AD converter overload!) will be dis-
played above the “Recording Level” slider. Adjust
the [LEVEL] knob or the output level of the external
audio device just low enough so that the “ADC
OVER!” does not appear (i.e., the maximum level
that does not cause an overload).
3Use the [LEVEL] knob to adjust to a suitable input
level. (Refer to step 6of “Connections and set-
tings for a monaural source.”)
4Select the 7.1: Insert Effect, Setup page.
Connections and settings for a stereo source
When sampling in stereo from a stereo mic, the output
of an external audio device or mixer, or synthesizer,
connect the source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks.
Make settings for “Insert Effect,” “IFX On/Off,”
and the “Pan (CC#8)” of the sound after it has
passed through the insert effect. (☞PG p.27, 121)
EXB-SMPL
Examples of settings using the insert effect are given
in “Mode (Sample Mode)” (☞PG p.93).
CD player
L
AUX OUT
R
Manual sampling
1Connect the L source to AUDIO INPUT jack 1, and
the R source to jack 2.
There are two methods of sampling: manual and auto.
2Make the settings described in steps 2–4of
In manual mode, sampling is started by pressing the
[START/ STOP] key from the recording standby condi-
tion (entered by pressing the [REC/ WRITE] key once).
For the sampling procedure in auto mode, refer to
“Connections and settings for a monaural source.”
3Set the “Input 1” and “Input 2” parameters to
specify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT
jacks will be received by the TR.
1Select the 1.1: Recording, Recording page.
2For “Mode (REC Mode),” select Manual.
This will select manual recording mode.
•
•
•
“Lvl” adjusts the volume. Set both Input 1 and
Input 2 to 127.
“Pan” adjust the panning. Set Input 1 to L000, and
Input 2 to R127.
Set “BUS.” For this example, select L/R for both
Input 1 and Input 2.
The settings in the example above will cause the
sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks to be
output in stereo from the AUDIO OUTPUT L/
MONO and R jacks and from the headphones. The
sound of AUDIO INPUT 1 will be output from the
left, and AUDIO INPUT 2 from the right.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Select the 1.1: Recording, Sample page.
8Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
4For “MS (Multisample Select),” select 000:
If an input signal is present, the Recording Level
[dB] meter will move according to the “Pan” setting
in “Input1” and “Input2.” This is the recording-
standby condition.
NewMS____000.
Immediately after the power is turned on, 000:
NewMS______000 will be created automatically.
Use the numeric keys [0]–[9] to input the multisam-
ple number that you wish to record, and press the
[ENTER] key.
In the case of “Connections and settings for a mon-
aural source,” the L meter will move. In the case of
“Connections and settings for a stereo source,” the L
and R meters will move.
If you select a new number, the Create New Multi-
sample dialog box will appear. Press the [F8] (“OK”)
key, and the new multisample will be created.
Use the “Recording Level” slider to adjust the level.
For this example, set the slider to the 0.0 setting
(☞PG p.94).
9At the moment that you wish to begin sampling,
press the [START/STOP] key.
Sampling will begin.
To specify the name, use the Utility menu command
“Rename MS.”
0Sampling will stop when you press the [START/
STOP] key.
5In “SMPL (Sample Select),” select the sample that
you wish to record. For this example, select ----: ---
No Assign----.
Sampling will stop automatically when the
remaining amount of memory reaches zero.
You may sample even in this condition. The sample
will be automatically recorded to a vacant sample
number.
AEither press the [AUDITION] key, or press the C2
key.
If you wish to start by specifying the sample num-
ber to be sampled, use the [INC]/ [DEC] keys or
numeric keys [0]–[9] and [ENTER] key to specify the
desired number.
The sample you recorded will play back.
If you wish to continue recording samples, repeat
steps 7–0.
A sample will be created when you record. A sam-
ple name such as 0000: NewSample_0000 will be
assigned automatically. This name can be edited
using the Utility menu command “Rename SMPL.”
Auto sampling
With auto mode, sampling will begin when the input
If you execute sampling when an existing sample
such as 0000: NewSample_0000 is selected, the new
sample will be sampled to a vacant sample number.
You do not need to be concerned with this setting
even when you continue recording successive sam-
ples.
signal exceeds the specified threshold level.
1Select the 1.1: Recording, Recording page.
6Select the 1.1: Recording, Recording page.
2For “Mode (REC Mode),” select Auto.
This will select auto recording mode.
3Set the “Threshold.”
When the input signal exceeds the “Threshold”
level, sampling will begin automatically. The black
triangles at both sides of the Recording Level [dB]
meter display will indicate the specified level.
7Set the “Mode (Sample Mode).”
Monaural source: If the “Input1” setting “Pan” is
L000, set “Mode (Sample Mode)” to L-Mono. If
“Pan” is R127, set “Mode (Sample Mode)” to R-
Mono.
Stereo source: Set the “Mode (Sample Mode)” to
Stereo.
When you use auto sampling, the attack portion of
the sampled input sound may be lost, depending
on the “Threshold” setting. If this occurs, you can
use “Pre Trigger” to sample the sound that occurs
before sampling actually begins. Normally you
will set this to 0, and use it only when necessary.
4Select the 1.1: Recording, Sample page.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5Select the “MS (Multisample Select).”
6Select the sample in “SMPL (Sample Select)” that
you wish to record.
7Select the 1.1: Recording, Recording page.
8Set the “Mode (Sample Mode).”
Immediately after the power is turned on, “Pstn
(Position)” will be R (Right), “Range (Zone
Range)” will be 012 (Keys), and “Orig.K (Original
Key Position)” will be Btm (Bottom), so that
indexes will be created as shown below.
9Press the [REC/WRITE] key.
0Press the [START/STOP] key.
When the input signal exceeds the “Threshold”
If you set “Range (Zone Range)” to 1(Key), an
index will be created for each note of the keyboard.
It is convenient to use 1(Key) when you wish to
sample numerous takes in succession, such as
when recording phrases or rhythm loops.
level, sampling will begin automatically.
ASampling will stop when you press the [START/
STOP] key.
Sampling will end automatically if the remaining
amount of memory reaches zero.
BEither press the [AUDITION] key, or press the C2
key.
4Select “Index.”
The sample you recorded will play back.
“Index” can also be selected by holding down the
[ENTER] key and playing a note on keyboard. For
this example, select 001.
Creating multisample indexes and
sampling
5Assign a sample to the “Index.”
If sampling RAM memory already contains sam-
ples, use “SMPL” (Sample Select) to select the
sample and assign it.
Here’s how to create indexes for a multisample, and
how to assign a sample to each index.
If you want to record a new sample, you can sam-
ple it now.
1Select the 1.1: Recording, Sample page.
MS(Multisample Select)
Index Keyboard & Index
The sample you record will be automatically
assigned to the index you selected in step 4. (☞For
the sampling procedure, refer to “Manual sam-
pling” or “Auto sampling.”)
The assigned sample will sound when you play the
keyboard in the range of the index to which the
sample is assigned, or when you press the [AUDI-
TION] key.
Create
2Select “MS (Multisample Select),” and create a
multisample. (Refer to “Manual sampling” 4)
6Repeat steps 4and 5to assign a sample to each
3Press the [F6] (“CREATE”) key to create an index.
index.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the
“Index” will be indicated as 001/001. This means
that there is only one index. The range that is high-
lighted in the keyboard & Index is the range of the
selected index.
The number and order of the indexes in a multi-
sample, the range of each index, and the original
key position can be freely changed later if desired.
Press the [F6] (“CREATE”) key several times. Each
time you press it, an index will be created. The key-
board display will indicate the zone and original
key location of each index. The highlighted area is
the currently selected index.
Creating multiple samples
In the example procedure described above, several
indexes were created (by pressing the [F6] (“CRE-
ATE”) key several times), and then samples were
assigned to each “Index.”
The index that is created when you press the [F6]
(“CREATE”) key will be created according to the
1.1: Recording, Input/ Pref page Create settings.
(These settings can also be made in 4.1: Multisam-
ple, Pref. page Create Zone Preference. ☞PG p.95,
120)
As an alternative method, it is also possible to create
one index, sample into it, and then repeat these two
steps.
1Press the [F6] (“CREATE”) key once to create an
index.
2Record a sample.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recorded sample will automatically be assigned
to the index you created in step 1.
4Specify the start address in “S (Start),” the loop
start address in “LpS (Loop Start),” and the end
address in “E (End).”
3Repeat steps 1and 2.
Select “S (Start)” (highlighted), and use the
This is an efficient way to record multiple samples.
[VALUE] dial or other VALUE controllers to modify
the value. The corresponding vertical line will
move. Set “LpS (Loop Start)” and “E (End)” in the
same way. In the example shown below, “S (Start)”
is set immediately before the first waveform, “LpS
(Loop Start)” is set immediately before the second
waveform, and “E (End)” is set as desired.
Loop settings
S (Start)
LpS (Loop Start)
E (End)
With the default settings after the power is turned on,
the sounds you sample will automatically be looped
(1.1: Recording, Input/ Pref page “AutoLoop (Auto
Loop On)” On)
To edit the loop and other playback address settings
for the sample, use the 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit2 page.
By using the ZOOM ([F4] key–[F7] key) you can
change the range that is displayed. When “S
(Start)” is highlighted, zoom will be performed
from the start address (☞PG p.101).
1Select the sample for which you wish to make
loop settings.
To select the sample, use the “SMPL (Sample
Select)” or “Index” parameters of 3.1: Loop Edit,
Edit 1 page or of the 1.1: Recording, Sample page.
If you use “SMPL (Sample Select)” to select the
sample, be aware that the assignment to the index
will also change.
If the “Zero (Use Zero)” check box is checked,
only those addresses where the waveform data
crosses the zero level will be found automatically
when searching, and can be set. This lets you eas-
ily make address settings where noise is less likely
to occur when looping.
2In the 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit1 page, use the “Lp
(Loop)” check box to turn loop playback on/off for
the sample.
Looping will be turned on if the box is checked.
This will operate between the addresses you specify
in step 4.
5If necessary, use the Utility menu command
“Truncate” to delete unwanted data that falls out-
side the start (or loop start) and end addresses.
Loop On: S→E→LpS→E→ (LpS→E is repeated)
Loop Off: S→E
Set the parameters, and press the [F8] (“OK”) key
to execute the operation. (☞PG p.102)
3Select the 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit2 page.
For cautions on the “Save to No.” and “Overwrite”
check boxes, refer to “About “Overwrite”” (☞PG
p.101).
The grid display
The waveform data of the currently selected sample
will be displayed. To hear this data, play a key in the
keyboard range that is highlighted in “Keyboard &
Index.” Alternatively, you can press the [AUDI-
TION] key to play back the data.
The Utility menu command “Grid” overlays the wave-
form display with a grid based on the BPM tempo
value. This makes it easy to make loop settings that are
synchronized to the tempo.
In the case of a sample that was sampled with a
“Mode (Sample Mode)” setting of Stereo, the
waveform display will alternate between L and R
each time you press the [F3] (“L/R”) key. At this
time, the upper right of the display will indicate
[L] or [R].
In the same way, the grid display can also be used
in 2.1: Sample Edit, Edit2 page. The grid can help
you to edit the waveform in synchronization with
the tempo.
1Select the Utility menu command “Grid”.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following dialog box will appear.
3Use “S (EditRangeStart)” and “E (EditRangeEnd)”
to specify the range that you wish to edit.
The selected range will be highlighted.
Check “Grid,” set “Resolution” as desired, and
press the [F8] (“OK”) key. The dotted grid lines will
appear.
If you wish to hear the sound of the selected range,
press the [START/STOP] key. The selected range
will play back at the pitch of the base key (the key
shown in gray on the keyboard display). You can
select the base key by holding down the [ENTER]
key and playing a note on keyboard.
When you play a key to which the sample is
assigned (the highlighted range of the keyboard dis-
played in “Keyboard & Index”), and the sample will
be played back according to its loop settings.
2Set “ꢀ (Grid Tempo)” to the desired BPM tempo
value.
3Set the end address so that it coincides with a dot-
ted line of the grid.
This will cause the loop interval to be the same
length as the BPM value.
The procedure for using the ZOOM and “Zero
(Use Zero)” check boxes is the same as for 3.1:
Loop Edit.
The grid display will be based at “LpS (Loop Start)”
if looping is on. If looping is off, the grid will be
based at “S (Start).”
4From the list of Utility menu, select the desired
editing command. Make the appropriate settings
in the dialog box, and press the [F8] (“OK”) key to
execute.
4To hide the grid display, select the Utility menu
command “Grid”, uncheck “Grid,” and press the
[F8] (“OK”) key.
The grid is displayed according to the playback
pitch of the base key (the key shown in gray in the
“Keyboard & Index” area).
For details on each command (☞PG p.101).
You can select the base key by holding down the
[ENTER] key and playing a note on the keyboard.
A note on saving samples
In the dialog boxes of some Utility menu, there is a
“Save to No.” setting that lets you specify the sample
number to which the edited sample will be saved. At
this time, a vacant sample number will be selected
automatically, so you will change the setting only if
you want to specify the save destination number.
Sample (waveform data) editing
Editing the waveform data of the sample is done in 2.1:
Sample Edit. You can use commands such as cut, copy,
and normalize to edit the waveform data.
If you check “Overwrite” in the dialog box of the com-
mand, the data prior to editing will be deleted, and
will be overwritten by the edited data. Normally, you
will execute the Write operation without checking this,
so that the unedited data is preserved. When you are
completely finished with your editing, you can use the
Utility menu command “Delete SMPL” to delete
unneeded samples.
1Select the sample that you wish to edit.
Use “SMPL (Sample Select)” or “Index” in the 2.1:
Sample Edit, Edit 1 page or the 1.1: Recording, Sam-
If you use “SMPL (Sample Select)” to select the
sample, be aware that the index assignment will
also change.
In Sampling mode, there is no Compare function
that lets you compare the data before and after
editing.
2Select the 2.1: Sample Edit, Edit2 page.
If you wish to preserve the unedited state of the
multisample or sample, use “Copy SMPL” or
“Copy MS” (☞PG p.96, 97) to copy the multisam-
ple or sample before you begin editing it.
For some Utility menu commands in 2.1: Sample
Edit or 3.1: Loop Edit, you can execute without
checking the “Overwrite” setting in the dialog
box, so that the sample data previous to editing
will be preserved.
The waveform data of the currently selected sample
will be displayed.
The waveform display of a sample that was sam-
pled with a “Mode (Sample Mode)” setting of
Stereo can be switched between the L and R wave-
forms by pressing the [F3] (“L/R”) key. When you
do so, [L] or [R] will be displayed alternately in the
upper right.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Pitch BPM Adj.” to set the loop interval to a
desired BPM value (☞PG p.119).
Multisample editing
Editing a multisample is accomplished with a number
of operations i.e. creating indexes for the multisample
and assigning a sample to each index, editing opera-
tions such as deleting, copying, and inserting indexes,
and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for
each index.
Multisample editing is performed in 4.1: Multisample.
Basic settings such as creating indexes and assign-
ing samples can also be made in the 1.1: Record-
ing, Sample page.
Converting a multisample to a
program
The Utility menu command “Conv. To Prog” can be
selected and executed in the various pages of 1.1:
Recording, in 2.1: Sample Edit, in Edit 1 of 3.1: Loop
Edit, in the various pages of 4.1: Multisample, and in
5.2: Ctrl Setup. When you execute this utility, the state
of the currently selected multisample will be converted
into a program.
Editing the indices
To change the number or order of the indexes, use the
INSERT, CUT, COPY, and CREATE.
1Select 4.1: Multisample.
In Program mode you can make filter, amp and effect
settings etc., and play the sample as a program. The
resulting program can be used in a combination or
multi.
For details on using the Utility menu command “Conv.
2Use “MS (Multisample Select)” to select the multi-
sample that you wish to edit.
3Select the “Index.”
Using samples in a drum kit
You can also select this by holding down the
[ENTER] key and playing a note.
A sample you created in Sampling mode can be used
as one of the instruments in a drum kit. In the GLO-
BAL 5.1: DKit, High Sample page and Low Sample
page, set “Drumsample Bank” to RAM, and use
“Drumsample” to select the sample that you created.
4Press the keys corresponding to the following
function buttons to edit the multisample by
changing the number or order of the indexes.
To delete the selected index, press the “CUT.”
The “INSERT” is used in conjunction with the Cut
and “Copy.” The contents of the index that was Cut
or Copied will be inserted.
The “CREATE” has the same function as the “CRE-
Modifying the settings of an index
1Make the settings described in steps 1–3of
2Set parameters for the selected index.
(☞PG p.118)
•
Changing the Edit1 page “Top K (Top Key)” will
change the upper limit of the zone. Simultaneously,
the lower limit of the next-numbered index will
also change.
•
•
If you check “Constant Pitch” in the Edit2 page,
playing any note within the zone of an index will
always sound the original pitch.
Edit2 page “Pitch” adjusts the sample pitch for
each index. You can use the Utility menu command
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you know the BPM, set the “Source BPM” field. If
you do not know the BPM, set “Beat” and the BPM
will be calculated automatically. In this example we
already know the BPM, so we will set “Source
BPM” to 120.
Using Time Slice to divide a sam-
ple and play it in Sequencer
mode
6Press the [F8] (“OK”) key.
Time Slice automatically detects the attacks of the kick
and snare etc. in a rhythm loop sample (a looped sam-
ple containing a drum pattern, etc.), and automatically
divides the sample at the appropriate points. The
resulting samples can be automatically turned into a
multisample and program. Sequencer mode perfor-
mance data for replaying the divided samples can also
be created automatically.
The sample will be sliced automatically, and the dia-
log box will appear.
Here are some ways that you can use a time-sliced
sample in a Sequencer mode song.
When you play the keyboard, C2 will sound the
original sample (Source), and the keys D2 and
above will play the divided samples.
•
Adjust the tempo of several rhythm loop samples
(all of differing tempos) without affecting their
pitch.
While you listen to each of the divided samples,
adjust “Sensitivity” so that each of the drums or
percussion instruments are separated. For some
samples, you may not be able to slice the samples
cleanly by adjusting “Sensitivity.” If the attack por-
tion of the next sample is heard at the end of a sam-
ple, or if two sounds are heard in a single sample,
you will need to make further edits.
•
Make realtime changes to the tempo without
changing the pitch.
Here is an example of the procedure for time-slicing a
rhythm loop sample in Sampling mode, and for play-
ing the resulting rhythm loop samples in Sequencer
mode.
You can try this using a rhythm loop sample that con-
tains a drum performance. You can record this on the
TR or use Media mode to load data from SD card etc.
When trying this for the first time, start with a fairly
simple one-measure 4/ 4 drum pattern. In this example
we are using a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample.
To edit, hold down the [ENTER] key and select the
“Index” that is assigned to the key you want to
edit. (That portion of the waveform display will be
highlighted.) Then you can adjust “S (Start)” and
“E (End),” use Divide to divide samples, or use
Link to join samples. (☞PG p.111 step 7)
1Access the SMPL 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit1 page.
7Press the [F6] (“Save”) key.
2In “SMPL,” select a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample.
The Save Smpl/ MS dialog box will appear.
From here you can save the time-sliced samples and
multisample.
At this time, you can adjust the settings in the
“With” area to specify which program will use the
samples and multisample, and the destination of the
Sequencer mode performance data (track or pat-
tern) that will be used to playback the rhythm loop
sample.
3Access the SMPL 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit2 page.
•
To create performance data in a track
Check “Program” and “Seq.Event”
Program: D072
Seq.Event: Track
Song: 000, Track: 01, Meter: 4/4
Start Measure: 001, Times: 008
Play back the sample, and check whether the beat
plays accurately across the looped point. If not,
access the SMPL 3.1: Loop Edit, Edit2 page, adjust
“S (Start)” (start address) and “E (End)” (end
address), and execute the “Truncate” utility menu
4Choose the “Time Slice” utility menu command.
Press the [F8] (“Save”) key to save your settings.
You will return to the dialog box of step 6.
The Set Sample Tempo dialog box will appear.
•
To create performance data in a pattern
In order to insert the data into a pattern, press the
[F6] (“Save”) key once again to access the Save
Smpl/ MS dialog box.
5Specify the quarter note time signature and the
Check “Program” and “Seq.Event”
Program: D073
tempo of the sample.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seq.Event: Pattern
Song: 001, Pattern: U00, Meter: 4/4
RPPR: On (checked), Key: C#2, Track: 01
As an example, try setting “ꢀ (Tempo)” to 100.
Notice that even if you change the playback tempo,
the pitch does not change.
If the beat of the rhythm loop sample is not repro-
duced correctly or if you hear unwanted noise
when you change the tempo, the reason may be
that slicing was not performed optimally in step
6. The accuracy with which each rhythm instru-
ment sound is separated will significantly affect
the quality of the playback. Try adjusting the sepa-
ration of each sample in step 6.
Press the [F8] (“Save”) key. to save your settings.
You will return to the dialog box of step 6.
8Press the [F7] (“Exit”) key to return to the screen of
step 3.
In some cases, playing back at a slower tempo may
cause the playback to sound unnatural because of
regions of silence between samples. Conversely
when you play back at a faster tempo, unnatural
noise may occur between samples. To avoid such
problems, set Stretch “New BPM” or “Ratio” in
step 7to the tempo that you will use during play
back. When you execute the time stretch com-
mand, the length of each sample will be adjusted
appropriately. (☞PG p.112 step 9)
9Press the [SEQ] key to enter Sequencer mode, and
set “Song Select” to 000.
The song data that you specified in step 7has been
automatically set/ created as shown below.
•
•
•
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Play/ REC page
Song: 000, Meter: 4/4, Tempo: 120
0In “Song Select,” select 001.
The song data that you specified in step 7has been
set/ created automatically as shown below.
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Prog..8 page
Track01
•
•
•
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Play/ REC page
Song: 001, Meter: 4/4, Tempo: 120, RPPR: On
Program: D072
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Loop..8 page
Track01
SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC, Prog..8 page
Track01 Program: D073
Loop On: On
Loop Start Meas: 001
Loop End Meas: 001
Play Intro: Off
SEQ 5.1: RPPR, RPPR Setup page
Key: C#2, Assign: On,
Pattern: User, U00, Track: Track01
Pattern data: 1 measure (D2–)
If you set “Start Measure” to other than 001 when
creating performance data in a track, the parame-
ters and programs of the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC,
Loop..8 page will not be set automatically. (“Loop
On” will be Off, and a program change will be cre-
ated at the beginning of the “Start Measure.”)
•
SEQ 5.2: Track Edit, Track Edit page
Track01: track data: 8 measures (D2–)
In the SEQ 5.1: RPPR, Pattern page, press the
SEQUENCER [START/STOP] key and pattern U00
will begin playing.
If you press the C#2 key in the SEQ 5.1: RPPR, RPPR
Setup page, the RPPR function will begin playing pat-
tern U00.
As in step 9, you can change the playback tempo with-
out affecting the pitch.
When you press the SEQUENCER [START/STOP]
key, playback will begin. According to the Track
Play Loop setting, the first measure will play as a
loop.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Global mode
In Global mode you can make settings that affect the
entire TR, such as user scales, category names, drum
kits, and user arpeggio patterns (☞PG p.123).
In GLOBAL 5.1: DKit you can edit these drum kits to
create your own original drum kits. You can also create
original drum kits using sample waveforms that you
sampled in Sampling mode (if the separately sold EXB-
SMPL option is installed) or loaded into internal mem-
ory in Media mode.
This chapter will describe the procedure for editing a
drum kit. For the procedure of editing a user arpeggio
A drum kit that you edited or created can be written
into one of the user drum kit memory areas 00 (INT)–
23 (User). In Media mode, drum kits can also be saved
to SD card or other external media.
When you play the keyboard in Global mode, the
TR will sound as in the previous mode in which
you were previously. Be aware that if you moved
from Sampling mode (if the separately sold EXB-
SMPL option is installed) to Global mode in a state
where the sampling memory contained no data
(such as immediately after the power is turned on),
playing the keyboard will not produce sound.
Multisample programs and drum kit programs
There are two types of programs: those whose oscilla-
tor uses a multisample, and those whose oscillator
uses a drum kit.
When you move from Sequencer to Global mode,
playing the keyboard will sound the program or
arpeggiator that corresponds to the global MIDI
channel (set in GLOBAL 2.1).
This selection is made by the PROG 2.1 Ed-Basic, Prog
Basic page “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” setting. To use a
multisample for the program, set “Mode (Oscillator
Mode)” to Single or Double. To use a drum kit, set
“Mode (Oscillator Mode)” to Drums.
The settings that you edit in Global mode are pre-
served as long as the power remains on, but will
be lost if not written to memory before the power
is turned off. The data handled in Global mode can
be classified into three types: user drum kit set-
tings (GLOBAL 5.1), user arpeggio pattern settings
(GLOBAL 6.1), and all other global settings (GLO-
BAL 1.1–4.1). Each of these three types of data can
be written into the memory area. In Media mode,
this data can also be saved on external media such
About program parameters
Just as the character and effect processing of a melodic
instrument such as piano, organ, trumpet, and strings
is fundamentally different from that of percussion
instruments such as drums or timpani, the program
parameter structure of a multisample program (“Mode
(Oscillator Mode)” to Single or Double) is fundamen-
tally different from that of a drum kit program (“Mode
(Oscillator Mode)” to Drums).
The program parameters of a multisample specify fil-
ter and amp settings etc. appropriate for a multisam-
ple. For this reason, it is difficult to change such a
program for use with a drum kit. Thus if you wish to
edit a drum kit, you should first use Program mode to
select a program that uses a drum kit (“Mode (Oscilla-
tor Mode)” = Drums), and then move to the GLOBAL
5.1: DKit page.
Global mode does not provide a Compare function
that lets you make before-and-after comparisons
of your editing. Before editing user drum kits, or
user arpeggio patterns, you may wish to use
“Copy Drum Kit” or “Copy Arpeggio Pattern” to
copy the user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern to
an unused number.
Creating a drum kit
About drum kits
A drum kit consists of drum samples (PCM drum
waveform data) assigned to each note, with individual
adjustments for pitch and level, etc.
This instrument has 24 drum kit memory areas. With
the factory settings, 00 (INT)–15 (INT) contain pre-
loaded drum kits suitable for a variety of musical
styles. 24 (GM)–32 (GM) contain nine different preset
drum kits that are compatible with the GM2 sound
map. (☞For details on the factory-set drum kits, refer
to “VNL”.)
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
want only to change the pitch, such as with tom or
cymbal sounds.
Editing a drum kit
6Use “Drumsample Bank” and “Drumsample” to
select the drum sample that will be assigned to the
note number.
Before editing a drum kit, uncheck the Memory
Set the High Drumsample in the High Sample page,
and the Low Drumsample in the Low Sample page.
If you specify a Low Drumsample, use “Vel.SW
L→H” to specify how velocity will switch between
the High Drumsample and the Low Drumsample.
(☞7)
Set “Drumsample Bank” to ROM or EX if you want
to select ROM samples. Set “Drumsample Bank” to
RAM if you want to select samples that were
recorded in Sampling mode or loaded in Media
mode using the EXB-SMPL option.
1In PROG 1.1: Play, select the program that you
wish to use while editing the drum kit.
Select a drum kit program from the preload pro-
grams etc. If the drum kit that you will be editing is
already being used by a program, select that pro-
gram. (In the separate “VNL,” programs that use a
d
drum kit are marked by a
symbol.)
Set “Octave” (PROG 2.1–2) to +0 [8']. With a set-
ting other than +0 [8'], the relationship between
the keys and the sounds will be incorrect.
The effects will sound using the settings of the last-
selected program.
About ROM drumsamples
When you edit a drum kit, all programs that use
that drum kit will be affected.
This instrument contains 518 drumsamples in its inter-
nal memory.
You can use the Utility “Select by Category” to select
ROM drum samples from fifteen categories.
For the drumsample names, refer to the separate
“VNL.”
2Access the High Sample page of GLOBAL 5.1:
DKit.
“Key”
7Use “Vel. SW L→H” to specify how velocity will
switch between drumsamples.
“Drumsample Bank” “Drumsample”
The drumsample that sounds when you perform
will depend on the velocity (keyboard playing
strength) of the incoming note. This is called veloc-
ity drumsample switching.
If you set this to 001, only the High Drumsample
will sound.
3In “Drum Kit,” select the drum kit that you wish
to edit.
If necessary, use the Utility “Copy Drum Kit” to
copy settings from a preload drum kit or a GM
drum kit.
☞ This is the same type of function as the Velocity
GM drum kits 24 (GM) – 32 (GM) cannot be
selected here. (It is not possible to edit or write a
GM drum kit.) If you wish to modify the settings
of one of the drum kits 24 (GM) – 32 (GM), you
can use “Copy Drum Kit” to copy it to 00 (INT) –
23 (User), and then edit the copy.
8Set the parameters of the drumsamples that you
assigned.
Set the High Drumsample parameters in the High
Sample page, and the Low Drumsample parameters
in the Low Sample page.
4Use “Key” to select the note number that you wish
to edit.
You can set parameters such as volume level
(“Level”), pitch (“Trans,” “Tune”), and tone (“Fc,”
“Reso”). (☞For details on each parameter, refer to
PG p.134.)
The drum sample parameters for the selected note
number will be displayed in the High Sample, Low
Sample, and Voice/ Mix pages. In addition to using
the VALUE controllers, you can also use the follow-
ing methods to select the note number.
9As necessary, repeat steps 4–8to set drumsample
parameters for each note number.
•
•
Hold down the [ENTER] key and play a key on the
keyboard to input that note number.
Use the [F6](“Key–”) and [F7](“Key+”) keys to
increment or decrement the note numbers.
If you wish to use the settings of another “KEY,”
select the Utility “Copy Key Setup”.
0Select the Voice/Mixer page in GLOBAL 5.1: DKit.
5Use “Assign” to specify whether a drum sample
will be assigned to the note number.
If this is checked, a drum sample will be assigned to
that note number. Normally you will check this.
If this is not checked, no drum sample will be
assigned to that note number. That note number
will sound the drum sample assigned at its right,
but a semitone lower. Use this setting when you
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASet the “Excl Group (Exclusive Group).”
The “Excl Group (Exclusive Group)” setting is used
when you wish to group drumsamples of the same
type.
For example if the note number to which a open hi-
hat and a closed hi-hat drumsample are assigned
are set to the same exclusive group number, they
will be grouped so that the open hi-hat and closed
hi-hat can not be sounded simultaneously, ensuring
that the hi-hat performance will sound natural.
BUse “BUS” to specify the output routing.
Set this when you wish to send the output of the
drumsample assigned to each note number to its
own insert effect or AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVID-
UAL) jack 1–2.
For example you can specify IFX for snare-type
sounds, and L/R for the other sounds. If you want to
send only a specific drum sample to AUDIO OUT-
PUT (INDIVIDUAL) 1 and/ or 2, select 1, 2, or 1/2.
These settings are valid if “Use DKit Setting”
(PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, BUS page) is checked for
the program that uses this drum kit (☞PG p.26, 160).
CUse “Pan” to specify the stereo output position.
The setting you make here is valid if the “Use DKit
Setting” is checked (PROG 5.1: Ed-Amp1, Level/
Pan page) for the program that uses this drum kit.
DUse “S1 (Send1(MFX1))” and “S2 (Send2(MFX2))”
to set the send levels to the master effects.
The settings you make here are valid if the “Use
DKit Setting” is checked (PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX,
BUS page) for the program that uses this drum kit.
EUse the Utility “Write Drum Kits” to save the data.
If you wish to change the name of the drum kit
before you save it, use the Utility “Rename Drum
If you turn off the power before writing the data
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media mode
For the formatting procedure, refer to “Format” (☞PG
p.156).
How Media mode is organized
Media must be formatted. SD cards or external
SCSI media that was formatted on a device other
than the TR may not be recognized correctly.
In Media mode you can use an SD card or a connected
external SCSI device (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
is installed) to save or load various types of data. You
can also make settings related to saving and loading
functionality.
It is not possible to format media of other than 512
bytes per block (e.g., 640 Mbyte or 1.3 Gbyte MO
disks).
For details on connecting an external SCSI device and
setting the SCSI ID, refer to refer to the manual
included with the EXB-SMPL.
SD card handling
Media that can be used
•
The SD card may be hot immediately following use.
Power-off the TR and wait for the card to cool
before removing it.
SD card
•
•
SD cards are precision parts. Do not bend them,
drop them, or subject them to physical shock.
Avoid using or storing SD cards in locations of
extremely high or low temperature such as in direct
sunlight, a closed automobile, or near a heater, or in
locations of high humidity or excessive dust.
Avoid using or storing SD cards in locations where
they may be subject to strong static electricity or
electrical noise.
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the
contacts of an SD card. If the contacts should
become soiled, gently wipe them off using a dry
cloth.
The SD card is not included. It must be purchased
separately.
The TR supports SD cards with a power supply volt-
age of 2.7–3.6V and capacities of 16 MB - 1 GB, and SD
card with ID.
•
•
External SCSI storage media
If the EXB-SMPL option (sold separately) is installed,
the TR can save data on external SCSI media (maxi-
mum 4 GB) such as a hard disk, Zip, Jaz, ORB, or MO
drive.
•
•
•
When you are not using an SD card, keep it in the
protective case that was included with the card to
prevent it from being damaged by static electricity.
Do not leave an SD card where it is accessible by
infants or children who might place it in their
mouth and swallow it.
When the EXB-SMPL option is installed, an external
SCSI device of up to 4 GB can be formatted.
When you insert media for the first time after turn-
ing on the power, or after changing disks, you
must press a function key etc. to make the TR
detect the media. When the disk (or other media)
is recognized, media information will appear in
the LCD screen.
Carefully read and observe the owner’s manual
included with your SD card.
If more than one volume of media is currently rec-
ognized, select “Media” and use the [INC]/ [DEC]
keys to switch between media.
About the write protect setting of
an SD card
The TR cannot format media with a format of other
than 512 bytes/ block (such as 640 MB, 1.3 GB MO
disks etc.).
SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the
data from being overwritten accidentally and lost. If
you set the card’s switch to the “protected” setting, it
will be impossible to write or erase data on the card, or
to format it. If you need to save edited data on the card,
move the switch back to its original “unprotected” set-
ting.
Formatting media
SD card or external SCSI media (via the EXB-SMPL
option) must be formatted.
Newly purchased media or media that has been used
by another device cannot be used immediately on the
TR. It must first be formatted for use on the TR.
The TR supports MS-DOS format.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data loading procedure
Write protect
switch
LOCK
Loading Programs, Combinations, Drum
kits, User arpeggio patterns, and Global
settings (loading a .PCG file)
Protected
As an example, here’s how to load a .PCG file. A .PCG
file contains programs, combinations, drum kits, user
arpeggiator patterns, and global settings (see diagram
below).
Select this if you have used “Save All” or “Save PCG”
to save your own original programs and combinations,
and want to reload this data.
Loading data
If you want to load programs, combinations,
songs, user drum kits, and user arpeggio patterns,
you must first uncheck the memory protect setting
Types of data that can be loaded
The data that can be loaded from external media (e.g.,
SD card) is shown in the diagram below. (☞For details
on each type of data, refer to PG p.141)
If the EXB-SMPL option is installed, data can also be
loaded from media such as a hard disk or CD-ROM.
1If you are loading data from SD card, insert the SD
card into the SD card slot.
For details on handling SD cards, please refer to
“Cautions when handling an SD card.”
If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed and you are loading data from a hard
disk or other external SCSI device, refer to the
manual included with the EXB-SMPL, and verify
that the external SCSI device is connected cor-
rectly and that the media contains the file you
want to load.
DOS directory
Undefined DOS file
Files that can be loaded
DOS files
.PCG file
All programs
1 program
1 program
bank [A–D]
DOS file
.MID file
1 combination
bank [A–C]
1 combination
All combinations
All drum kits
.EXL file
1 drum kit group
[INT, User]
1 drum kit
AKAI format program file
AKAI format sample file
.KMP file
.KSF file
.KSC file
.AIF file
All user arpeggio
patterns
1 user arpeggio
pattern group
[INT, User]
1 user arpeggio
pattern
Global settings
.SNG file
Cue list
.WAV file
1 song
Track
[000–199]
1 user pattern
[00–99]
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2Enter Media mode, and press any function key to
make the TR recognize the media.
Saving data
For the procedure of saving data to an SD card or to
external SCSI media, refer to “Saving on external
3Select the Load page.
Types of data that can be saved
The LCD screen will display file information.
The following types of data can be saved on external
media (SD card etc.). If the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed, data can also be saved on high-
capacity media such as a hard disk.
4If you are loading from an external SCSI device,
use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the media that
contains the data you want to load.
5Use the [ ], [ ] cursor keys to select a .PCG file.
•
.PCG files
The selected file will be highlighted.
Programs, combinations, global settings, drum kits,
user arpeggio patterns (the data specified by the
“S.Item” (Select Save Items) check boxes when sav-
ing will be saved).
If the data you want to load is located in a lower or
higher level of the directory structure, press the
[F6] (“OPEN”) or [F5] (“UP”) keys to display the
desired data, and then select it.
•
•
.SNG files
Songs, cue lists
When you load a .PCG file, the data in the internal
memory of the TR will be overwritten by the data
from the .PCG file (programs, combinations, drum
kits, user arpeggio patterns, global settings). If
internal memory contains data that you want to
keep, use “Save All” or “Save PCG” to save it
before you load other data.
.KSC files
Script file (.KSC files) listing the multisamples and
samples created in Sampling mode (if the separately
sold EXB-SMPL option is installed), with multisam-
ples (.KMP files) and samples (.KSF files)
•
•
Standard MIDI files (SMF)
A single pattern of Sequencer mode can be saved as
SMF data.
6In the Utility menu, select “Load Selected.”
System exclusive data
System exclusive data received by the TR from an
external MIDI device (the TR can be used as a data
filer).
•
.WAVE files, .AIFF files
A dialog box will appear. The display and opera-
tions will differ depending on the type of file that is
to be loaded. For details on each type of file, refer to
PG p.143.
Samples you created in Sampling mode (if the sepa-
rately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed) can be
exported and saved as .WAVE files or .AIFF files.
7If you execute the Load operation with “Load
********.SNG too” checked, the .SNG file will be
loaded at the same time as the .PCG file.
For details on each type of file and the icon associ-
ated with it, refer to the lower diagram on p.101.
If you execute the Load operation with “Load
********.KSC too” checked, the .KSC file will be
loaded at the same time as the .PCG file.
8Press the [F8] (“OK”) key to execute the Load oper-
ation.
Loading will be halted if the specified data is not
found in the file. (☞PG p.143)
Never remove the media while the data is being
loaded.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arpeggiator settings
This chapter describes the procedure for making
P000: UP
arpeggiator settings in each mode. For details on the
arpeggiator function, refer to “Using the arpeggiator
UP
Arpeggiator settings for a pro-
gram
P001: DOWN
DOWN
Arpeggiator on/ off
Each time you press the [ARP ON/ OFF] key, the
arpeggiator will be switched on or off. When on, the
[ARP ON/ OFF] key will light. When you play the key-
board, an arpeggio will play according to the selected
arpeggio pattern.
P002: ALT1
The on/ off setting is stored when the program is
written.
ALT1
Arpeggiator settings
1Select the PROG 6.1: Ed-Arp., Arpeg. Setup page.
P003: ALT2
ALT2
2Use “ꢀ (Tempo)” to set the tempo.
You can adjust the tempo by rotating REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [TEMPO] knob. The LED will
blink at the specified tempo.
P004: RANDOM
If “MIDI Clock” (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI) is set to
External or Ext-USB, the display will indicate “ꢀ =
EXT.” This setting lets you synchronize the tempo
with an external MIDI device. In this case, it will
not be possible to change the tempo on the TR.
RANDOM
3In “Pattern,” select the arpeggio pattern.
You can select from preset arpeggio patterns P000–
P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 (INT)–215
(User).
U000 (INT)–U199 (INT)
With the factory settings, various arpeggio patterns
are preloaded. These include a variety of patterns
such as drum or bass phrases, or guitar or keyboard
backing riffs (☞VNL).
The way in which the pattern is played will depend
on settings such as “Octave” and “Sort.” P000–P004
in the following diagrams show how the arpeggio
will be played when “Octave” is set to 1, and “Sort”
is checked. P004: RANDOM is one possibility.
U200 (User) – U215 (User)
With the factory settings, these do not contain pat-
terns.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4Make settings for the various parameters.
Sort
“Octave”: Select the octave range in which the
OFF, UP
arpeggio will be played.
Sort
ON, UP
Octave: 4
UP
“Latch”: If this is checked, the arpeggio will con-
tinue playing even after you take your hand off the
keyboard. If this is unchecked, the arpeggio will
stop playing when you take your hand off the key-
board.
If a user arpeggio pattern is selected, the “Octave
Motion” setting (GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Setup
page) will affect the way in which the arpeggio is
played.
“Key Sync.”: If this is checked, the arpeggio pattern
will start from the beginning when you play a note
after having released all notes. This setting is suit-
able when you are playing in realtime, and want the
arpeggio to start at the beginning of the measure.
If this is unchecked, the arpeggio pattern will
always be synchronized to the tempo of the MIDI
clock. For details on synchronization, refer to “Syn-
“Reso”: Specifies the timing value of the arpeggio
notes over a range of ꢁ3 – ꢀ .
“Gate”: Specifies the length (gate time) of each note
in the arpeggio. If a user arpeggio pattern is
selected, you can set this to Step. In this case, the
value of the “Gt” setting for each step (GLOBAL 6.1:
Arp.Pattern, Edit page) will be used.
“Keyboard”: If this is checked, the notes you play
on the keyboard will be heard as well as the arpeg-
giated notes.
If this is unchecked, only the arpeggiated notes will
be heard.
This value will be in effect when the REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-GATE] knob is in the
center position (12 o’clock). Be sure that the knob
is in the center position when you make this set-
ting.
The same setting can be made by editing the param-
eter of the same name (or abbreviation) in the PROG
1.1: Play, Arp.Play page.
“Velocity”: Specifies the velocity of the notes in the
arpeggio. If this is set to Key, the velocity with
which you actually played the note will be used. If a
user arpeggio pattern is selected, you can set this to
Step. In this case, the value of the “Vel” setting for
each step (GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Edit page) will
be used.
You can use the Utility “Copy Arpeggiator” to
copy arpeggiator settings from another program
or combination (☞PG p.25).
5In the Scan Zone page, specify the range in which
the arpeggiator will operate.
This value will be in effect when the REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-VELOCITY] knob is in
the center position (12 o’clock). Be sure that the
knob is in the center position when you make this
setting.
“Key Btm,” “Key Top”: The arpeggiator will oper-
ate when you play keys within the specified range.
Keys outside of this range can be played in the nor-
mal manner, and will not be affected by the arpeg-
giator on/ off.
When a preload user arpeggio pattern is selected,
setting the “Gate” or “Velocity” to Step will add a
sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern.
“Swing”: This adjusts the timing of the even-num-
bered notes in the arpeggio (counting from the first
note), to give the pattern a sense of “swing.”
For example if you set “Pattern” to P000: UP,
check “Latch,” set “Key Top” to B3, and “Key
Btm” to C-1, playing a note B3 or lower will trig-
ger the arpeggiator. Since “Latch” is on, the arpeg-
gio will continue even after you release the keys.
You can use the C4 and higher keys to play con-
ventionally along with the arpeggio sounded by
the B3 and lower keys. To change the arpeggio,
play keys in the range of B3 and below.
“Sort”: If this is checked, the arpeggio will be
sounded in order of pitch, regardless of the order in
which notes were played on keyboard (On).
If this is unchecked, the arpeggio will be sounded
in the order in which the notes were played on key-
board (Off).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Vel Btm,” “Vel Top”: The arpeggiator will operate
when you play notes with a velocity (playing
strength) that is within the specified range. Notes
played with a velocity outside this range will be
sounded normally, without regard to the arpeggia-
tor on/ off.
Arpeggiator settings
1Select COMBI 2.1: Ed-Prog/Mix, Prog page.
Select programs for the timbres that you wish to
use. For this example, select any desired program
for timbres 1–4.
6If you wish to save the edited program settings to
internal memory, turn off memory protect in Glo-
2Select COMBI 3.1: Ed-Paraml. MIDI page.
For the timbres that you will be using, set “Status”
to INT, and set “MIDI Channel” to Gch or to the
global MIDI channel (set in GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI
“MIDI Channel”).
Linking the arpeggiator to a program
For this example, set timbres 1–4 to a “Status” of
INT, and timbres 5–8 to a “Status” of Off. Set the
“MIDI Channel” of timbres 1–4 to Gch.
If you want the arpeggiator settings written in a pro-
gram to be selected when that program is selected,
check Program for “Auto Arp.” (GLOBAL 1.1: System,
Basic page).
Arpeggiator settings in Combina-
tion and Sequencer modes
3Select COMBI 6.1: Ed-Arp., Setup page.
In Combination and Sequencer modes, the TR pro-
vides dual arpeggiator functionality that lets you use
two arpeggio patterns simultaneously. The settings in
each of these modes are made in the similar way.
As an example, the following explanation shows how
to make settings in Combination mode. For a detailed
explanation and example settings (☞PG p.43, 82).
4Set “ꢀ (Temp)” to specify the tempo.
ever, the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A
and B.
The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the fol-
lowing things.
•
Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre. Choose from
Off, (arpeggiator) A, or (arpeggiator) B.
☞step5
5Make “Assign” settings.
Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres.
Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that
has been assigned to it.
•
•
•
Independently specify whether A and B will
operate.
☞step6
Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters
6Make “Arpeggiator Run” settings.
independently for A and B.
☞step7
Check the arpeggiator(s) that you want to operate.
The arpeggiator(s) checked here will run when the
[ARP ON/ OFF] key is turned on.
Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can use
keyboard range or playing velocity to switch
between normal playing and arpeggiated playing,
or to switch between arpeggiators A and B.
☞step8
With the settings shown in the LCD screen for steps
2and 3, turning the [ARP ON/ OFF] key on will
cause arpeggiator A to operate for timbres 1 and 2,
and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre 3. When the
[ARP ON/ OFF] key is turned off, timbres 1–4 will
sound as a layer.
•
Make settings for timbres that will be silent when
the arpeggiator is Off, and will sound only when
the arpeggiator is On.
☞step0
If all timbres “Assign” are Off, or if neither “Arpeg-
giator Run” A or B is checked, the arpeggiator will
not function.
Arpeggiator on/ off
Each time you press the [ARP ON/ OFF] key, the
arpeggiator will be switched on or off. When on, the
[ARP ON/ OFF] key will light. The selected arpeggio
pattern will begin when you play the keyboard. The
on/ off setting is saved when the combination is writ-
ten into memory.
7In the Arp. A and Arp. B pages, set the parameters
for arpeggiators A and B.
The parameters for A and B are the same as for a
8In the Scan Zone page, specify the range in which
arpeggiators A and B will operate.
If “Assign” is Off or “Arpeggiator Run” is not
checked, the arpeggiator will not operate even if
this key is on.
The parameters for A and B are the same as for a
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can use keyboard ranges or playing velocity to
operate the arpeggiator, or to switch between arpeg-
giators A and B. By using the COMBI 3.3: Ed-Key
Zone, Key page and COMBI 3.4: Ed-Vel Zone, Vel
page to set keyboard ranges and velocity ranges in
conjunction with each other, you can create even
more variations.
(Gch). T4 will be sounded by arpeggiator A. Since
the “Status” of T8 is Off, it will not sound.
•
Since the “Status” of T8 is Off, it will not sound,
regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off. It
is a dummy timbre that causes T4 to sound only
when the arpeggiator is on.
9If you wish to save the edited combination set-
tings in internal memory, turn off memory protect
in Global mode, and write the combination.
Combination B071: “In The Pocket”
Select and play combination B071: “In The Pocket.”
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI chan-
nel (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Channel”) is set to 01.
0The “Status,” “MIDI Channel” and “Assign” set-
tings shown in the LCD screen of steps 2and 3
can be made so that certain timbres will sound
only when the arpeggiator is On, and will be silent
when the arpeggiator is not Off.
•
Arpeggiator A is assigned to T7 and T8, and
arpeggiator B is assigned to T5. When you play the
keyboard, the T7 program C004: HipHop Kit will
be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U143(INT): Dr-
In The Pocket. The T5 program A066: Chord
Trigger will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern
U100(INT): Bs-Echo.
Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing
technique, we will describe the settings of one of the
preset combinations as an example.
•
•
The B “Key Btm” and “Key Top” (COMBI 6.1: Ed-
Arp., Scan Zone page) are set so that arpeggiators B
will operate only for the G3 note and above.
Combination A021: Urban Nature RnB
Select combination A021: Urban Nature RnB, and play
it.
Arpeggiator B is assigned to T8 as well, but this
setting is so that the T7 program C004: HipHop Kit
will sound only when the arpeggiator is on. Refer
to the preceding section “Select and play
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI chan-
nel (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Channel”) is set to 01.
•
Arpeggiator A is assigned to T (timbre) 4 and 8.
When you play the keyboard, the arpeggio pattern
U144(INT): Dr-Nature RnB will sound only the T4
program B004: Trance/GarageKit.
Combination A021: Urban Nature RnB.”
•
The arpeggio pattern uses the Fixed Note setting,
which is appropriate when playing a drum
arpeggio. (“Fixed Note” is checked in, GLOBAL
6.1: Arp.Pattern, Setup page.) With this setting, the
arpeggio pattern will always play the specified
pitches regardless of the note numbers received
from the keyboard. (☞PG p.138)
Linking the arpeggiator to the combi-
nation
If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combination
to become active when that combination is selected,
check “Combi” for “Auto Arp” (GLOBAL 1.1: System,
Basic page).
•
•
The A “Key Btm” and “Key Top” (COMBI 6.1: Ed-
Arp., Scan Zone page) are set so that arpeggiator A
will operate only for notes B3 and lower.
Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T8, but this is so
that the T4 program B004: Trance/GarageKit will
sound only when the arpeggiator is on.
Notice the timbre settings for T4 and T8
Status
INT
MIDI Channel
Assign
T4
T8
02
A
A
Off
Gch
•
•
If the arpeggiator is off, playing the keyboard will
sound the timbre(s) that are set to Gch or to the
global MIDI channel (in this case, 01). Since the
“MIDI Channel” of T4 is set to 02, it will not sound.
T8 is set to Gch, but since “Status” is Off it will not
sound.
Any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre will
trigger the arpeggiator. In this case, these will be
“MIDI Channel” 02 and Gch (global MIDI channel).
When the arpeggiator is on, playing the keyboard
will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to T8
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a blank pattern is selected, playing the keyboard
will not start an arpeggio. Although preset arpeg-
gio patterns P000–P004 can be selected, they can-
not be edited.
Creating a user arpeggio pattern
When you edit a user arpeggio pattern, the
changes will have an effect anytime that this pat-
tern is used in Program, Combination, or Song.
About user arpeggio patterns
The patterns that can be selected on the TR’s arpeggia-
tor are called “arpeggio patterns.” There are two types
of arpeggio patterns: preset arpeggio patterns and
user arpeggio patterns.
5In “Lgth (Length),” specify the length of the pat-
tern.
After the pattern has played for the length specified,
it will return to the beginning. This setting can also
be changed during or after editing. For this exam-
ple, set it to 8.
Preset arpeggio patterns: There are five patterns; UP,
DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and RANDOM.
The operation of these patterns is fixed, and cannot be
edited.
For the preload arpeggio patterns U000(INT)–
U199(INT), simply changing the “Lgth” can sig-
nificantly change the character of the pattern. Try
changing the length and listening to the result.
User arpeggio patterns: There are 216 patterns -
U000(INT)–U215(User) - which can develop chords or
phrases in a wide variety of ways, based on the pitches
that you play on the keyboard or the timing at which
you play them.
In GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern you can modify these user
arpeggio patterns, or create a new user arpeggio pat-
tern from an initialized condition. Edited user arpeggio
patterns can be written to internal memory areas
U000(INT)–U215(User). In Media mode, they can also
6Make settings for the “ꢀ (Tempo),” “Reso (Resolu-
tion),” “Oct (Octave),” “Sort,” “Latch,” “K.Sync
(Key Sync.),” and “Kbd (Keyboard)” parameters.
These are program parameters, but can be set from
here as well.
If after moving here from Program mode, you
modify these parameters and wish to keep your
changes, return to Program mode and write the
program. These parameters are not saved by
“Write Arpeggio Pattern.”
Editing a user arpeggio pattern
When you wish to edit a user arpeggio pattern,
first turn off memory protect by unchecking the
Memory Protect “Arp. UsrPat” check box in the
Preference page of GLOBAL 1.1: System.
For this example, make the settings shown in the
illustration 3.
7The “Type (Arpeggio Type),” “Octave Motion,”
and “Fixed Note” parameters specify how the
arpeggio will be developed.
If you enter this mode from the Program mode, your
editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for
the selected program.
These settings can be changed during or after edit-
ing (☞PG p.138).
1In Program mode, select a program for which the
arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is selected, or a
program that you wish to use as a basis for editing
the arpeggio pattern.
8Select the Edit page.
2Press the [ARP ON/OFF] key to turn the arpeggia-
tor on (the key will light).
Even if you moved to Global mode from a program
in which the arpeggiator was turned off, you can
use the [ARP ON/ OFF] key to turn it on.
A pattern consists of Steps and Tones.
•
Step: A user arpeggio pattern can have a
maximum of 48 steps. The arpeggiator will play
from the first step, in steps equal to the timing
value specified by “Reso (Resolution).” The
vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of
the LCD screen indicate the steps.
3Select the GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Setup page.
Use “Step (Step No.)” to select the step. For each
step, specify “Ptch (Pitch Offset),” “Gt (Gate),”
“Vel (Velocity)” and “Flam.”
4In “Pattern,” select the arpeggio pattern that you
wish to edit.
To change Step, you can either use the [ ], [
keys or select “Step (Step No.)” and use the
[VALUE] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys.
]
For this example, select an empty user arpeggio pat-
tern.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Tone: At each step, a chord consisting of up to 12 0For steps 01–08, make settings for “Ptch (Pitch Off-
tones (Tone No. 00–11) can be sounded.
set),” “Gt (Gate),” “Vel (Velocity),” and “Flam.”
To input tones, select “Step (Step No.)” and then
use numeric keys [0]–[9], [–], and [./ HOLD] to
input tones. The “Tone No.” corresponds to the
[0]–[9], [–], and [./ HOLD] keys as shown below.
Each time you press a [0]–[9], [–], or [./ HOLD]
key, the corresponding tone will be turned on/
off. The horizontal lines of the grid shown in the
center of the LCD screen indicate the tones.
“Ptch (Pitch Offset)”: This offsets the pitch of the
arpeggio note in semitones up or down. You can
input the same tone for each step, and change the
“Ptch (Pitch Offset)” value for each to create a mel-
“Gt (Gate)”: Specify the length of the arpeggio note
for each step. With a setting of LGT, the note will
continue sounding either until the next note of the
same tone or until the end of the pattern. With a set-
ting of Off, the note will not sound.
Tone00–09: [0]–[9] keys
Tone10: [–] key
Tone11: [./ HOLD] key
“Vel (Velocity)”: Specify the strength of the note.
With a setting of Key, the note will sound at the
strength with which it was actually played.
Tone No.
4
3
2
1
0
The “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” settings you
make here will be valid if the “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel
(Velocity)” parameters (PROG 6.1: Ed–Arp.,
Arpeg. Setup page) of the program selected in Pro-
gram mode are set to Step. If these parameters
have a setting other than Step, the “Gt (Gate)” and
“Vel (Velocity)” that were specified for each indi-
vidual step will be ignored, and all notes of the
arpeggio will sound according to the settings in
PROG 6.1: Ed-Arp. Be sure to verify the settings of
the program.
01
05
Step No.
Lgth(Length)
Creating an example pattern
Before you set “Gt (Gate),” move the REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-GATE] knob to the
center position (12 o’clock).
Before you set “Vel (Velocity),” move the REAL-
TIME CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-VELOCITY]
knob to the center position (12 o’clock).
1Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the [0] key.
2Set “Step (Step No.)” to 02, and press the [1] key.
3Set “Step (Step No.)” to 03, and press the [2] key.
4Set “Step (Step No.)” to 04, and press the [1] key.
5Set “Step (Step No.)” to 05, and press the [3] key.
6Set “Step (Step No.)” to 06, and press the [1] key.
7Set “Step (Step No.)” to 07, and press the [2] key.
8Set “Step (Step No.)” to 08, and press the [1] key.
ATo change the user arpeggio pattern name, use the
BIf you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat-
tern to internal memory, be sure to Write the user
If you turn off the power without writing, the edited
contents will be lost.
CIf you wish to save the state of the program at the
same time, return to Program mode and write the
9When you play the keyboard as shown in the
illustration, the arpeggiator will begin playing.
Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of
chord you play on the keyboard. (If “Sort” is
unchecked, it will correspond to the pitch of the
first note you play.) Likewise, Tone 1 is the next
highest pitch played on the keyboard, and so on up
to 12 tones in any one step.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed
guitar chord, select “Flam.” In Program mode,
select an acoustic guitar program, and choose the
user arpeggio pattern that you created here. In the
Setup page of PROG 6.1: Ed-Arpeg., set “Gate” to
Step.
Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pat-
tern
Melody pattern
Then return to the GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Edit
page. For odd-numbered steps, set “Flam” to a
positive (+) value. For even-numbered steps, set
“Flam” to a negative (–) value.
1Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the [0] key.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.
2Set “Step (Step No.)” to 02, and press the [0] key.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +10.
Drum pattern
3Set “Step (Step No.)” to 03, and press the [0] key.
You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern
by using “Fixed Note” with a drum program.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.
4Set “Step (Step No.)” to 04, and press the [0] key.
1Select a drum kit program.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.
For this example, select preset program A020: Stan-
dard Kit 1.
5Set “Step (Step No.)” to 05, and press the [0] key.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +12.
2Select the GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Setup page,
6For “Step (Step No.)” 06, do not enter a tone.
and set the parameters.
7Set “Step (Step No.)” to 07, and press the [0] key.
Check “Fixed Note.” If this is checked, tones will
always sound at the specified pitch.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.
8Set “Step (Step No.)” to 08, and press the [0] key.
If you set “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” to Trigger All
Tones, playing a single note will cause all Tones to
sound.
Set “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to –02.
If you set “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” to Trigger As
Played, the notes you play will determine how
Chordal pattern
Fixed Note
Tone No. Fixed Note No.
Mode(Fixed Note Mode)
If “Fixed Note” is checked, you will be able to set
“Tone No.” and “Fixed Note No.”
Select “Tone No.,” and then set “Fixed Note No.” to
specify the note number that the tone will sound.
Here, set “Tone No.” and “Fixed Note No.” as fol-
lows.
1Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the [0] key.
Set “Gt (Gate)” to LGT.
Tone No. Fixed Note No.
2For “Step (Step No.)” 02, do not enter a tone.
00
01
02
03
C2 (kick)
3Set “Step (Step No.)” to 03, and press the [1], [2],
F2 (snare)
[3], [4] keys.
F#3 (closed hi-hat)
A#3 (open hi-hat)
4Set “Step (Step No.)” to 04, and press the [1], [2],
[3], [4] keys.
5For “Step (Step No.)” 05, do not enter a tone.
The drumsamples that correspond to each note
number will differ depending on the drum kit. You
will find it convenient to audition the drum sounds
from the keyboard, and then input the “Fixed Note
No.” by holding down the [ENTER] key and play-
ing the desired note.
6Set “Step (Step No.)” to 06, and press the [1], [2],
[3], [4] keys.
Set “Gt (Gate)” to LGT.
7For “Step (Step No.)” 07, do not enter a tone.
8Set “Step (Step No.)” to 08, and press the [1], [2],
[3], [4] keys.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Select the Edit page.
Before you set “Gate,” move the REALTIME CON-
TROLS C-mode [ARP-GATE] knob to the center
position (12 o’clock).
Each Tone in the display will be shown as a small
circle.
For each horizontal line (Tone) in the display, you
will specify a drumsample (note number) of the
drum kit.
Before you set “Velocity,” move the REALTIME
CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-VELOCITY] knob to
the center position (12 o’clock).
Next we will input a rhythm pattern.
Dual arpeggiator editing
Here we will use a combination as an example in our
explanation.
The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio
pattern in Sequencer mode.
If you have entered this mode from the Combination
mode, the arpeggio pattern selected by the combina-
tion will be affected by your editing.
4Input the kick (Tone00).
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the [0] key.
Then set “Step (Step No.)” to 05, and press the [0]
key.
1In Combination mode, select a combination that
uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit.
For this example, select a combination to which
arpeggiators A and B is assigned.
5Input the snare (Tone01).
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 03, and press the [1] key.
Then set “Step (Step No.)” to 07, and press the [1]
key.
2Press the [ARP ON/OFF] key to turn on the arpeg-
giator (the key will light).
6Input the closed hi-hat (Tone02).
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, and 07,
and press the [2] key for each.
Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when
you moved here, you can use the [ARP ON/ OFF]
key to turn it on. However, if “Arpeggiator Run” A
or B are not checked, and if no timbres have been
assigned in “Assign,” then the arpeggiator will not
operate.
7Input the open hi-hat (Tone03).
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 04, and press the [3] key.
Then set “Step (Step No.)” to 08, and press the [3]
key.
3Select the GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, Setup page.
If “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” is set to Trigger All
Tones, playing a single note on the keyboard will
cause the rhythm pattern to play.
4If you moved here from Combination mode, use
the “Arp (Arpeggio Select)” A and B to select the
arpeggiator that you wish to edit.
If “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” is set to Trigger As
Played, playing a single note on the keyboard will
cause only the kick (Tone00) to play. Playing two
notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick
(Tone00) and snare (Tone01) to play. In this way, the
number of keys that you play will be played by the
same number of tones.
If this is A, your editing will apply to the parame-
ters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A.
If this is B, your editing will apply to the parameters
and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B.
5Switch between arpeggiators A and B, and edit
their respective user arpeggio patterns.
If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators, return to
Combination mode, and in COMBI 1.1: Play, select
the Arp. A or the Arp. B page and uncheck the
“Arpeggiator Run” check box.
8Set the parameters for each step.
Use “Vel (Velocity)” etc. to add accents to the
rhythm pattern.
6To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern, use
The “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” settings you
make here will be valid if the “Gate” and “Veloc-
ity” parameters (PROG 6.1: Ed–Arp., Arpeg. Setup
page) of the program selected in Program mode
are set to Step.
7If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat-
tern in internal memory, you must write the user
arpeggio pattern.
If these parameters have a setting other than Step,
the “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” that were
specified for each individual step will be ignored,
and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according
to the specified gate and velocity.
In this case, both user arpeggio patterns will be
written simultaneously. If you turn off the power
without writing, the edited contents will be lost
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8If you wish to save the state of the combination at
the same time, return to Combination mode and
Synchronization between the arpeg-
giators and sequencer in Sequencer
mode
When editing a user arpeggio pattern, pay atten-
tion to the global MIDI channel, the channel of
each track, and the arpeggiator assignments, and
make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is
the pattern that you wish to edit.
When song playback is stopped
•
•
•
The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “ꢀ
(Tempo)” based on the timing of the internal MIDI
clock.
In Sequencer mode when an RPPR pattern is
playing, the arpeggiator will synchronize to the
beats of that pattern.
If you want the RPPR pattern playback to
synchronize to the currently-running arpeggiator,
set “Sync” (SEQ 5.1: RPPR, RPPR Setup page) to
SEQ.
If you moved here from Sampling mode (if the
separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed), the
arpeggiator will not turn on. Nor will it be possible
to edit arpeggio patterns.
Synchronizing the arpeggiator
Playback will synchronize to the “ꢀ (Tempo)” timing
of the arpeggiator.
The note timing of the arpeggiator will differ depend-
ing on the state of the arpeggiator “Key Sync.” check
box.
When a song is being played or recorded
If this is checked, the arpeggiator will operate at the
timing of the first note-on you play from a state in
which all keys are released.
•
The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats based
on the timing of the song.
If this is unchecked, the arpeggiator will operate in
synchronization with the internal or external MIDI
clock.
Synchronization with Song Start
•
When the arpeggiator is on (the [ARP ON/ OFF]
key is on) and running, receiving a Song Start
message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning
of the pattern. (This has no relation to the “Key
Sync.” setting.)
The paragraphs below explain how synchronization
occurs when the “Key Sync.” check box is unchecked.
(However, synchronization with Song Start and with
the MIDI realtime command Start message are excep-
tions to this.)
•
In Sequencer mode when the “Key Sync.” setting is
unchecked and the [ARP ON/ OFF] key is on,
starting the arpeggiator by pressing notes during
the pre-count before recording will cause the
arpeggiator to start (and be recorded) from the
beginning of the arpeggio pattern at the moment
that recording begins.
Synchronization between arpeggia-
tors A and B
In Combination and Sequencer mode, two arpeggia-
tors can operate simultaneously. In this case, if you
start an arpeggiator (whose “Key Sync.” is unchecked)
while the other arpeggiator is already running, the
arpeggiator you started will synchronize to the “ꢀ
(Tempo)” based on the timing of the already-running
arpeggiator.
Synchronization with an external
sequencer in Program, Combination,
or Sequencer modes
In Program, Combination, and Sequencer modes when
“ꢀ (Tempo)” is EXT (GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Clock”
set to External or Ext-USB), the TR will synchronize to
MIDI Clock and Start messages received from an exter-
nal MIDI sequencer (or similar device) connected by a
MIDI cable.
If “Key Sync.” is checked, A and B will each oper-
ate on their own timing.
Synchronization to external MIDI clock
•
The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “ꢀ
(Tempo)” based on the timing of the external MIDI
clock.
Synchronization to the MIDI Start message
•
When the arpeggiator is on and operating,
receiving a MIDI Start message will cause the
arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pattern.
(This has no relation to the “Key Sync.” setting.)
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects settings
The effect section of the TR provides one insert effect,
two master effects, one master EQ (stereo 3-band EQ),
and a mixer that controls the routing of these compo-
nents.
Sample
Recording
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
Insert Effect
The external input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 (if the
separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed) can be
used outside of Sampling mode. In Program, Combi-
nation, and Sequencer modes, the external input sound
can be processed by the insert effect, master effects,
and master EQ.
You can choose from 89 types of full-digital effects for
each effect. The effects are categorized as follows.
Categories of the 89 effect types
01–15
16–31
32–40
Filter and dynamics effects, such as EQ and com-
pressor
This means that you can use the TR as a 2-in/ 4-out
effect processor.
Pitch and phase modulation effects, such as chorus
and phaser
Other modulation and pitch-shift effects such as
rotary speaker and pitch shifter
Send
Return
Master Effect 1,2
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Insert Effect
Master EQ
Oscillator
Filter
Amplifier
41–51
52–57
58–89
Early reflection and delay effects
Reverb effects
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
Mono and mono-chain effects in which two mono
effects are connected in series
Routing settings and effect set-
tings
Effects in each mode
The insert effect, master, effects, and master EQ that
can be used in each mode are structured identically.
However, you can change the routing to specify how
the oscillator(s) of a program, the timbres of a combi-
nation, or the tracks of a song will be sent to the insert
effect or master effects. In the pages that follow, we will
explain how you can make routing settings and effect
settings in each mode.
In Program mode, insert effect can be used as part of
the sound-creating process, in the same way that the
output sound of the oscillator (OSC) is processed by
the filter and amp to create the final sound. Then the
master effects can be used to apply spatial-type effects
such as reverb. The stereo 3-band master EQ located
immediately before the OUTPUT (MAIN) L/ MONO
and R outputs is used to make final adjustments in
tone. These settings can be made independently for
each program.
Send
Return
Effect settings for a program
Master Effect 1,2
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Oscillator
Filter
Amplifier
Insert Effect
Master EQ
Routing
In Combination mode, and Sequencer mode, insert
effect can be used to help create the sound of each tim-
bre/ track. The master effects are used to apply overall
spatial processing, and the master EQ is used to make
overall adjustments in tone.
1Select the PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, BUS page.
These settings are made in Combination mode inde-
pendently for each combination, and in Sequencer
mode for each song the entire mode.
2Set “BUS Select (All OSCs)” to specify where the
Send
Return
Master Effect 1,2
oscillator output will be sent.
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Timbre 1
Timbre 2
/
/
Track 1
Track 2
Master EQ
Insert Effect
L/R: The output will not be sent to the insert effect.
After passing through the master EQ, the sound will
be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/ MONO and
R.
Timbre 8
/
Track 16
In Sampling mode (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL
option is installed), the sound of an external source
that is input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 can be pro-
cessed by the insert effect as the sound is sampled.
Sampling mode settings are made by the “Input 1” and
“Input 2” parameters of the SMPL 1.1: Recording,
Input/ Pref page. The settings here are valid only
within Sampling mode.
IFX: The output will be sent to insert effect IFX.
1, 2, 1/2: The output will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL) 1 or 2. It will not be sent to the
insert effect, the master effects, or the master EQ.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off: The output will not be sent to AUDIO OUT-
PUT (MAIN) L/ MONO, R, or to (INDIVIDUAL) 1,
2 (After passing through the master effects, it will be
output from AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN).) Select this
when you wish to connect the output to the master
effects in a series connection at the send levels spec-
ified by “MFX Send.”
Master effects
The input level of the master effect is determined by
the send level 1 and 2 settings (routing step 3, or
insert effect step 4). If send levels 1 and 2 are 0, no
master effects will be applied. Send level 1 is for MFX1,
and send level 2 is for MFX2.
1Select the PROG 7.2: Ed-MasterFX, Setup page.
3“MFX Send” specifies the send level from each
oscillator to the master effects.
This is valid only if “BUS Select (All OSCs)” is set to
L/R or Off.
If IFX is selected for “BUS Select (All OSCs),” the
send level to the master effects is adjusted by the
“Send 1 (MFX1)” and “Send 2 (MFX2)” parameters
(PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, Setup page) after the signal
has passed through the insert effect.
2In “Master Effect 1” and “Master Effect 2,” select
the type of each master effect.
The procedure is the same as for the insert effect.
(☞step 1)
Insert effect
1Access the PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, Setup page.
The input/ output of the master effect is mono-on/
stereo-out. Even if you select a stereo-input type
effect, the input will be monaural.
The Setup page displays the state of the routing and
insert effect settings. In this page you can also make
“BUS Select” settings. Use the [ ], [ ] cursor keys
to select (All OSCs), and use the [INC]/ [DEC] keys
to make the setting.
3In “On/Off,” switch each master effect on/off.
If this is Off, the output of the master effect will be
muted.
4Specify the routing of master effects 1 and 2.
For details on the routing settings, refer to PG p.163.
5In “Rtn (Return 1, 2),” adjust the output level of
each master effect.
For each effect, the W value of “W/ D” (Wet/ Dry)
is the effect output level. This is multiplied by the
return value (“Rtn”=127 is x1.0) to determine the
actual master effect output level.
2In “Insert Effect,” select the desired insert effect.
You can use the Utility “Select by Category” to
select effects from six categories.
3In “On/Off,” turn the insert effect on/off.
6Move to the MFX1 or MFX2 page, and set the
parameters of the effect that you selected as the
master effect.
If this is set to Off, the result will be the same as if
00: No Effect is selected. The input sound will be
output without change.
For details on the parameters of each effect, refer to
PG p.168–.
You can use the Utility “Copy Insert Effect” to
copy effect settings from another program, etc.
Master EQ
4Set the “Pan (CC#8),” “BUS Select,” “S1 (Send1
(MFX1)),” and “S2 (Send2 (MFX2))” parameters
that follow the insert effect.
1Use the stereo 3-band master EQ to make final
equalizing adjustments immediately before the
sound is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT L/
MONO and R jacks.
“Pan (CC#8)”: Set the pan. This is valid only if “BUS
Select” is set to L/R.
“BUS Select”: Specify the output destination. Nor-
mally you will set this to L/R. If you want to output
the sound from AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 1
and/ or 2, set this to 1, 2, or 1/2.
“Send1 (MFX1),” “Send2 (MFX2)”: Set the send
level to the master effects. For this example, set
these to 127.
Master EQ settings can be made in “Master EQ Gain
[dB]” of the PROG 7.2: Ed-MasterFX, Setup page, or
in the Master EQ page.
For details on master EQ parameters, refer to PG
p.213.
5Move to the IFX page, and set the parameters of
the effect that you selected for the insert effect.
For details on the parameters of each effect, refer to
PG p.168–.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Master effects
Master EQ
These settings are made in the same way as for pro-
Effect settings in combination, and
song
In Combination, and Sequencer modes, you can spec-
ify the routing of each timbre/ track to the insert effect
and master effects. These settings are made in the same
way in each of these modes. We will be using the
example of Combination mode in our explanation
here.
Effect settings in Sampling mode
(requires the EXB-SMPL option)
In Sampling mode, insert effect can be applied to an
external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT
1 and 2 jacks, and sampled.
Routing
1Select the COMBI 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, BUS page.
Routing
1Select the SMPL 1.1: Recording, Input/Pref page.
The parameters in “Input1” and “Input2” specify
the insert effect to which the external audio input
from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks will be sent.
For details on these settings, refer to “Sampling”
2In “BUS Select,” specify where the output of each
timbre will be sent.
3“S1 (Send1(MFX1)),” “S2 (Send2(MFX2))” speci-
fies the send level from each timbre to the master
effects.
Insert effect
Select the effect that will be used by the insert effect,
This can be set only if “BUS Select” is set to L/R or
Off.
Master effects
Master EQ
The master effects and master EQ cannot be used in
Sampling mode.
The actual send level will be the send level of each
timbre multiplied by the send level of each oscilla-
tor of the program selected for the timbre. If the
send level of a program is 0, the actual level will be
zero even if the send level setting is raised here.
If IFX is selected for “BUS Select,” set the send lev-
els to the master effects by adjusting the “S1
(Send1(MFX1))” and “S2 (Send2(MFX2))” parame-
ters (COMBI 7.1: Ed-Insert FX, Setup page) located
after the signal has passed through the insert
effect.
Insert effect
The Setup page displays the state of the routing and
insert effect settings. “BUS Select” settings can also be
made in this page. Use the cursor keys [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
] to select the timbre, and use the [INC]/ [DEC] keys
to make the setting.
In this example, IFX is used by 1 (timbre 1) and 2 (tim-
bre 2).
In the same way as for a program, you can select the
insert effect, turn it on/ off, and set the “Pan (CC#8),”
“BUS Select,” “S1 (Send 1 (MFX1)),” and “S2
(Send2(MFX2))” parameters that follow the insert
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If “BUS (IFX/ Indiv.) Select” is set to IFX, this is set
by “Send1 (MFX1)” and “Send2 (MFX2)” (Setup
page) after the sound has passed through the insert
effect.
Effect settings for the AUDIO INPUT
(requires the EXB-SMPL option)
Even in modes other than Sampling mode, the TR’s
effects can be applied to the external audio source con-
nected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks. The effect
section of the TR can be used as a 2-in 4-out effect pro-
cessor.
If “BUS (IFX/ Indiv.) Select” is set to other than Off
and “Level” is raised, the external audio source
will be input to the TR. At this time, if audio cables
are connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks, any
noise component will be input to the TR even if
there is no actual audio input, and (depending on
the settings) will be output from the AUDIO OUT-
PUT L/ MONO, R, 1, 2 jacks. If you are not using
an external audio source, and are playing only the
internal programs, combinations, and songs, you
should set “BUS (IFX/ Indiv.) Select” to Off, or set
“Level” to 0.
Routing
In modes other than Sampling mode (i.e., in Combina-
tion, Program, and Sequencer modes) the audio input
routing from the AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks is specified
in the GLOBAL 1.1: System, Audio In page.
1Enter Global mode from Program mode.
If audio cables are not connected to the rear panel
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 jacks, the input to the TR will
be 0.
If you enter Global mode from Sampling mode,
the “Input 1” and “Input 2” settings of Sampling
mode will be maintained, and you will not be able
to hear the settings made in Global mode. You
must move here from a mode that can access exter-
nal audio signals (Combination, Program, or
Sequencer). In Sampling mode, the settings you
make here are ignored. AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 set-
tings for Sampling mode are made by the “Input
1” and “Input 2” parameters in the In/ Pref page of
About dynamic modulation
(Dmod)
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) is a function that lets
you use MIDI messages or the TR’s controllers to con-
trol specific effect parameters in realtime.
BPM/ MIDI Sync is another function that controls
effect parameters, and is used to synchronize the LFO
speed of modulation-type effects or the delay time etc.
of delay-type effects to the tempo of the arpeggiator or
an external sequencer.
2Select the GLOBAL 1.1: System, Audio In page.
For details on each of these functions, refer to PG p.221.
Setting example:
3Set the parameters for “Input1” and “Input2.”
We will show how you can use dynamic modulation to
control an effect parameter in realtime.
“Input1” corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and
“Input2” corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 2 jack.
Delay. Verify that a delay sound is being output.
“Level”: Set the signal level from AUDIO INPUT 1
and 2. Normally you will set this to 127. If the sound
is still distorted even when this level is lowered sig-
nificantly, it is possible that the distortion is occur-
ring before the AD converter. Adjust the [LEVEL]
knob or the output level of your external audio
source.
2Select the PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, IFX page.
Using the Dmod function to vary the delay level by
pushing the joystick
“Pan”: Set the panning of the signal from AUDIO
INPUT 1 and 2. When you are inputting a stereo
audio source, you will normally set Input 1 to L000,
and Input 2 to R127 (or Input 1 to R127, and Input 2
to L000). When you are inputting a monaural audio
source, you will normally set this to C064.
3Set “InLvl Mod” to +100.
4Set “Src” to JS+Y#1.
The joystick will control the input level to the effect.
When you set “Src” to JS+Y#1, the delay sound will
no longer be output; however it will gradually
increase as you move the joystick away from your-
self.
“BUS (IFX/Indiv.) Select”: In the same way as for
the oscillator of a program, specify the bus to which
the external audio source from AUDIO INPUT jacks
“Send 1,” “Send 2”: Specify the send levels from the
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 (external input sound) to the
master effects, in the same way as for the program
oscillators. This setting can be made only if “BUS
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some effects, you can synchronize the LFO fre-
quency to the tempo. Set the effect parameters
“BPM/ MIDI Sync” to On, and “BPM” to MIDI.
For details refer to PG p.172.
Using the Dmod function to vary the feedback
level by operating [SW1] key
5In the PROG 2.2: Ed-Ctrl, Controls page, set the
function of “SW1” to SW1 Mod. (CC#80), Toggle.
6Return to the PROG 7.1: Ed-InsertFX, IFX page,
and set the C Fb (C Delay Feedback) “(Source)” to
SW1 #80.
7Set “(Amount)” to +30.
8Press the [Exit] key etc. to return to the PROG 1.1:
Play page.
When you (move the joystick away from yourself
and) press the [SW1] key, the feedback level will
increase, and the delay sound will continue repeat-
ing.
The “(Amount)” setting determines the feedback
level when the [SW1] key is pressed. If you set
“(Amount)” to –10 and press the [SW1] key, the
feedback level will be 0.
Using the BPM/ MIDI Sync. function to synchronize
the delay time to arpeggiator tempo changes.
9Set “BPM” to MIDI.
0For L, C, and R, set “L/C/R Bs” and “Times” as
desired.
For this example, set “L/ C/ R Bs” to ꢂ and “Times”
to 1 so that the effect will be easily understandable.
The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th
note.
ASet the realtime controller function to C-mode,
and rotate REALTIME CONTROLS knob [4]
(“TEMPO”).
When you (move the joystick away from yourself
and) rotate the knob, the delay time will change.
BTurn on the [ARP ON/OFF] key to start the arpeg-
giator.
Move the joystick away from yourself and select the
desired arpeggio pattern.
When you rotate REALTIME CONTROLS knob [4],
the delay time will change in synchronization to any
changes you make in the arpeggiator tempo.
If you rotate the REALTIME CONTROLS knob [4]
to change the tempo while the delay is sounding,
noise may occur in the delay sound. This is
because the delay sound becomes discontinuous,
and is not a malfunction.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other functions
Tuning to another instrument/
Transposing
Specifying the function of the
Assignable Switch and Assign-
able Pedal
When you play this instrument together with other
instruments, or along with music on a CD or tape, you
may need to adjust the tuning so that the pitch
matches. To adjust the tuning, use GLOBAL 1.1: Sys-
tem Basic page “Master Tune.” The tuning can be
adjusted in a range of –50 – +50 cents (one semitone is
100 cents).
Set the assignable function of a footswitch (such as the
Korg PS-1) connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH
jack.
This switch can act as a source for alternate modula-
tion or effect dynamic modulation, or switch porta-
mento on/ off, control the sostenuto effect, turn the soft
pedal effect on/ off, turn the arpeggiator on/ off, select
programs or combinations (up/ down), start/ stop the
sequencer, punch-in/ out on the sequencer, or be a trig-
ger to advance the cue list step (☞PG p.226).
You can also transpose by changing the pitch in semi-
tone steps. To transpose the pitch of the entire this
instrument, use GLOBAL 1.1: System Basic page “Key
Transpose.” The pitch can be transposed over a range
of ±1 octave.
•
This setting is made in GLOBAL 1.1: System, Foot
page “Foot SW Assign.”
Here we will explain how to adjust the tuning and
transposition of the entire this instrument in Global
mode.
You can specify the assignable function that will be
performed by a footpedal (such as the Korg XVP-10
EXP/ VOL or EXP-2) connected to the ASSIGNABLE
PEDAL jack.
1Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode.
2Press the [EXIT] key.
3Press the [F1] (“Basic”) key.
This pedal can be used to control master volume, alter-
nate modulation or effect dynamic modulation, porta-
mento pitch change speed, volume, the pan following
an insert effect, pan, volume, or send levels to the mas-
ter effects (☞PG p.227).
4To adjust the tuning, select “Master Tune.” to
adjust the transposition, select “Key Transpose.”
5Use the VALUE controllers to adjust the setting.
You can use numeric keys [0]–[9] to enter a value
and press the [ENTER] key. Alternatively, you can
use the [VALUE] dial, or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys.
•
This setting is made in GLOBAL 1.1: System, Foot
page “Foot Pedal Assign.”
You can use this as a source for alternate modula-
tion or effect dynamic modulation, and use it to
control program parameters or effect parameters.
In this case, set “Foot Switch Assign” to Foot SW
(CC#82), and “Foot Pedal Assign” to Foot Pedal
(CC#04).
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
Here we will show how to make settings that allow an
assignable switch to change programs or combina-
tions.
Bypassing the effects
Normally, effects are turned on/ off within each pro-
gram, combination, or song, or in Sampling mode.
However if you want the entire-instrument to not use
any effects, you can use this Global bypass feature.
1Connect a Korg PS-1 pedal switch (or other
momentary footswitch) to the ASSIGNABLE
SWITCH jack.
1Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode.
2Press the [EXIT] key.
2Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode.
3Press the [EXIT] key.
3Press the [F1] “(Basic)” key.
4Press the [F3] (“Foot”) key.
4To turn off insert effect, check the “IFX Off” check
5Select “Foot SW Assign,” and select either Pro-
box.
gram Up or Program Down.
To turn off master effect 1, check the “MFX1 Off”
check box. To turn off master effect 2, check the
“MFX2 Off” check box.
If you select Program Up, the next higher program
number will be selected each time you press the foot
switch.
If you select Program Down, the next lower pro-
gram number will be selected each time you press
the foot switch.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6Set “Foot SW Polarity” to the polarity of the pedal
you connected.
Creating original scales
If you connected a Korg PS-1 pedal switch, select (-)
KORG Standard. The pedal will not function cor-
rectly if you do not select the correct polarity.
You can create your own original scales. You can create
sixteen different User Octave Scales in which the pitch
of each note in the octave is repeated for all octaves,
and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each
of the 128 notes can be specified independently.
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
7Press the [PROG] key to enter PROG 1.1: Play, or
press the [COMBI] key to enter COMBI 1.1: Play.
Then press the foot switch, and the program/com-
bination will change.
The user scales you create here can be used by specify-
ing the scale for a program, for each timbre of a combi-
Selecting different Velocity and
Aftertouch curves
Changing the scale
You can change the way in which velocity or after
touch will affect the volume or tone. Using this feature,
you can (for example) make the volume of the notes
more consistent even when they are played with vary-
ing velocities (dynamics). Each curve has its own char-
acter, so you can select the curve that is appropriate for
your own playing dynamics, playing style, and the
effect that you wish to obtain (☞PG p.124).
You can specify the scale for each program, for each
timbre in a combination, or for each track of a song
(Sequencer mode).
These settings are made by “Type” in the following
pages, and by “Use Program’s Scale” for a combination
or sequencer.
Program mode
PROG 2.1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic
1Press the [GLOBAL] key to enter Global mode.
2Press the [EXIT] key.
Combination mode COMBI 3.2: Ed–Param2, Other
Sequencer mode
SEQ 3.2: Param2, Other (Othr..8/Othr..16)
3Press the [F1] (“Basic”) key.
Here we will show how to make settings in Sequencer
mode.
4To change the velocity curve, select “Velocity
Curve” and specify the desired curve.
1Press the [SEQ] key to enter Sequencer mode.
To change the after touch curve, select “AfterT
Curve,” and specify the desired curve.
2Press the [MENU] key, and then press the [F3] key
to select “Prm2” Press the [F8] (“Open”) key.
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
3Select the [F1](“Othr..8”) key or the
[F2](“Othr..16”) key.
4If you wish to use the scale that is specified for the
program used by a track, check the “Use Prog’s
Scale” check box for that track.
This setting will affect the operation of the entire
this instrument.
Each program has parameters that allow you to
adjust the effect of velocity (playing dynamics),
and the change will depend on the settings of
these parameters. These parameters can be indi-
vidually set in detail in Program mode.
Tracks that are not checked will use the scale speci-
fied by Scale “Type.”
5Set “Type (Song’s Scale)” to select the scale for the
entire currently selected song.
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the function of [SW1] and
[SW2]
Setting the B-mode functions of
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4]
You can specify the function of the [SW1] and [SW2]
You can specify the B-mode functions of REALTIME
keys (☞PG p.224).
CONTROLS knobs [1]–[4]. (☞PG p.225)
The functions of the [SW1] and [SW2] keys are set
independently for each program, combination, and
song. In and Sampling mode, the functions of these
keys are set for the entire mode.
The B-mode functions are set independently for each
program, combination, or song. The functions in Sam-
pling mode (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed) are set for the entire mode.
You can specify the function that will be performed by
the [SW1] and [SW2] keys, and can also select between
Toggle (when the function will be switched on/ off
each time the [SW1] or [SW2] key is pressed) and
Momentary (when the function will be on only while
you continue holding the [SW1] or [SW2] key).
These settings are made by “Knob B Assign” in the fol-
lowing pages.
Program mode
PROG 2.2: Ed–Ctrl, Controls
Combination mode COMBI 2.2: Ed–Ctrl, Controls
Sequencer mode
Sampling mode*
SEQ 2.2: Controller, Controls
SMPL 5.2: Controller, Controls
These settings are made by “SW1/ 2 Assign” in the fol-
lowing pages.
*: If the EXB-SMPL option is installed
Program mode
PROG 2.2: Ed–Ctrl, Controls
You can use these knobs as sources for alternate
modulation or effect dynamic modulation, and
control program parameters or effect parameters.
In this case, you will normally select Knob
Mod.1(CC#17), Knob Mod.2(CC#19), Knob
Mod.3(CC#20), and Knob Mod.4(CC#21).
Combination mode COMBI 2.2: Ed–Ctrl, Controls
Sequencer mode
Sampling mode*
SEQ 2.2: Controller, Controls
SMPL 5.2: Controller, Controls
*: If the EXB-SMPL option is installed
When you write a program or combination, the
on/ off status of the [SW1] and [SW2] keys is mem-
orized.
Here we will give an example of how knob [1] can be
used to control the filter and amp EG attack of a pro-
gram.
You can use these keys as alternate modulation or
effect dynamic modulation sources, and control
program parameters or effect parameters.
In this case, you will normally select SW1
Mod.(CC#80) and SW2 Mod.(CC#81).
1Press the [PROG] key to enter Program mode.
2Press the [MENU] key, and then press the [F2] key
to select “Ctrl” Press the [F8] (“Open”) key.
3Select the Knob 1-B “Knob B Assign”, and select
F/A Attack (CC#73).
For an example in which the [SW1] key is specified as
an effect dynamic modulation source for a program
4Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] key
to select B-mode, and turn knob [1] to control the
EG attack of the filter and amp.
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
If you wish to keep this setting after the power is
turned off, you must Write the Global settings to
The settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved.
The settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5Lightly press the [TIMBRE/TRACK] key on the
beat, and slightly shorten the intervals at which
you press the key.
Adjusting the contrast (brightness)
of the LCD screen
The playback tempo of the drum pattern will speed
up slightly.
Use the GLOBAL 1.1: System, Preference page “LCD
Tap tempo control can be used whenever the
[TEMPO] knob can be operated. For example, the
tempo cannot be controlled while a song is playing
in Sequencer mode with “Tempo Mode” (☞PG
p.51) set to Auto.
Using this instrument as a data
filer
The tap tempo control function can also be con-
trolled from a foot switch connected to the
ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack, as well as by
the [TIMBRE/TRACK] key. (☞PG p.127 Global
mode “Foot SW Assign”)
MIDI exclusive data transmitted from an external
device can be received by this instrument and saved on
an SD card (the Data Filer function). This is done using
the Media mode Save page “Save Exclusive” (☞PG
p.154).
Shortcuts
[MENU] key + numeric keys [0]–[9] x2
Tap tempo control
•
Access the various pages within each mode. Hold
down the [MENU] key, and use numeric keys [0]–
[9] to input a two-digit page number.
A tap tempo control function is available in Program,
Combination, and Sequencer modes.
While the arpeggiator or sequencer is playing in any of
these modes, you can control the playback tempo in
real-time by lightly pressing the [TIMBRE/ TRACK]
key several times at the desired tempo.
This function is convenient when you want to match
the playback tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer
playback to another beat in real-time.
[MENU] key + [ ], [ ] keys
•
Access the various pages within each mode. Hold
down the [MENU] key, and use the [ ], [ ] keys
to move.
[TIMBRE/ TRACK] key + function keys [F1]–[F8]
•
Access the parameters within each page. In pages
of Combination Sequencer mode that show timbres
1–8/ tracks 1–8 or 9–16 (such as COMBI 1.1: Play,
Prog), hold down the [TIMBRE/ TRACK] key and
press the [F1 T1/ T9]–[F8 T8/ T16] keys to move the
cursor.
The Tap tempo feature also provides real-time control
over any BPM or tempo based effects.
The following example shows the procedure for using
Tap tempo in Program mode.
1In Program mode, select C004: HipHop Kit.
[ENTER] key + numeric keys [0]–[9]
•
Access the Utility menu commands of each page
(up to ten items). Hold down the [ENTER] key and
press a numeric key [0]–[9] to select from up to ten
of the Utility menu items.
[ENTER] key + keyboard
By holding down the [ENTER] key and pressing a note
on the keyboard of the TR, you can perform the follow-
ing input operations.
2In the PROG 1.1: Play, select the Are. Play page
and check the “Latch” check box.
•
•
Input note number values or velocity values
Select “KEY” in GLOBAL 5.1: DKit, SEQ 5.1: RPPR,
RPPR Setup page
[ENTER] key + [LOCATE] key
•
In Sequencer mode, set the current location as the
“Location” (equivalent to the Utility menu
command “Set Location”)
3Turn on the front panel ARPEGGIATOR [ON/
OFF] key.
4Lightly press the [TIMBRE/TRACK] key several
times at the desired beat. The tempo “ꢀ =” display
in the upper right of the LCD will change accord-
ing to the playback tempo.
When you play the keyboard, the arpeggiator will
play a drum pattern at the specified tempo.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Troubleshooting
If you experience problems, refer to the relevant item
•
If there is no sound from the OUTPUT
and take the appropriate measures.
(INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2 jacks, make sure that “BUS
Select (IFX/ Indiv.Out Assign)” or “Bus Select”
Power does not turn on
•
Is the AC/ AC power supply connected to an
•
If specific tracks in Sequencer mode do not
sound, Make sure that the “PLAY/ MUTE/ REC”
•
Is the [POWER] switch turned on?
Turn on the rear panel [POWER] switch.
•
•
Are the “Key Zone” and “Velocity Zone” set so that
sound will be produced when you play?
.......................................................................... ☞PG p.65
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown in
the LCD screen.
The TR functions normally when you play the key-
board or perform other operations.
Notes do not stop
•
•
Due to changes in the surrounding temperature, the
LCD screen may on rare occasions be difficult or
impossible to read. If this occurs, perform the
following procedure. (☞PG p.127)
In PROG 2.1: Ed–Basic, select the Prog Basic
page, make sure that the “Hold” check box is
unchecked. ....................................................... ☞PG p.5
1Press the [EXIT] key three times, and press the
•
In GLOBAL 1.1: System, Foot page, make sure that
“Damper Polarity” or “Foot SW Polarity” is set
correctly.
[GLOBAL] key.
2Hold down the [EXIT] key, and press the [REC/
........................................................................ ☞PG p.128
WRITE] key.
3Rotate the [VALUE] dial to adjust the LCD
Noise or oscillation is heard
screen.
•
When using the BPM/ MIDI Sync function to
control the delay time of an effect, noise may occur
in the delay sound. This noise is due to
discontinuities in the delay sound, and is not a
malfunction.
The power is turned on, but the LCD screen does
not display normally, or an error message is dis-
played. There is no sound when you play the key-
board, and the TR does not function normally.
•
When using an effect on the external audio source
being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2,
oscillation may occur depending on the type of
effect or on the parameter settings. Please adjust the
input level, output level, and effect parameters.
You need to be particularly careful when using a
high-gain effect.
•
This type of problem may occur if a data writing
operation to internal memory was not completed
correctly, for example if the power of the TR was
turned off while a program or other data was being
written. If this occurs, use the following procedure
to initialize the TR’s internal memory.
1Turn off the power.
•
After a sample edit has been executed, or after a
stereo sample has been recorded, a small noise may
be heard. This has no effect on the audio data that
was edited or sampled.
2Hold down the [MENU] key and the [9] key, and
turn on the power.
The TR will be initialized, and data will be written
into internal memory. While the data is being writ-
ten, the LCD screen will indicate “Now writing into
internal memory.”
Effects are not applied
•
Are the GLOBAL 1.1: System, Basic page “IFX Off,”
“MFX1 Off,” or “MFX2 Off” settings checked?
................................................................ ☞PG p.124, 125
No sound
•
Are connections made correctly to your amp,
•
If you are in Combination, Sequencer, and master
effects are not applied when you raise the “S1
(Send1 (MFX1))” or “S2 (Send2 (MFX2))” of the
timbre/ track, does “Return 1” or “Return 2” from
the master effect need to be raised?
.................................................................... ☞PG p.47, 86
Alternatively, has “Send 1” or “Send 2” for each
oscillator of the program used by the timbre/ track
been lowered?.......................................... ☞PG p.45, 84
•
•
Is your amp or mixer turned on?
Is Local Control turned on?
In GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, check the “Local Control
On” check box..............................................☞PG p.130
•
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The actual send level is determined by multiplying
the send setting of each oscillator in the program
with the send setting of the timbre/ track.
RPPR does not start
•
•
•
Is the SEQ 1.1: Play/ REC “RPPR” setting checked?
......................................................................... ☞PG p.51
Are “Assign,” “Pattern Select,” and “Track” set
When you loaded data, a combination or song
does not sound correctly
•
•
•
In the dialog box from which you saved the data,
did you check the check boxes for each item that
If the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Clock” parameter
set to Internal? ............................................ ☞PG p.129
You converted GM/ GS/ XG format SMF data and
played it in Sequencer mode, but it does not sound
correctly
In the dialog box when saving the data, did you
check the check boxes for each item that you
wanted to save?
•
•
•
Execute “GM Initialize” to initialize the settings.
......................................................................... ☞PG p.54
Are the bank/ number of the programs used by the
song the same as when the song was created?
Is GLOBAL 1.1: System, Preference page “Bank
Map” set to GM?......................................... ☞PG p.126
Playback does not start when you press the
[START/ STOP] key in Sequencer mode
Make sure that the “Status” is INT or BTH.
•
Is the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, MIDI page “MIDI Clock”
set to Internal?.............................................☞PG p.129
Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed
Can’t record in Sequencer mode
•
Make sure that the PROG 2.1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic
page “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” parameter is set to
•
In the GLOBAL 1.1: System, Preference page, is the
Memory Protect “Song” check box unchecked?
........................................................................☞PG p.127
Data is not transmitted from the MIDI OUT connec-
tor
•
Is the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, MIDI page “MIDI Clock”
set to Internal?.............................................☞PG p.129
•
If MIDI data is being transmitted from the TR via
USB to your computer, transmission from the MIDI
OUT connector is halted. If the USB connection is
broken, transmission from the MIDI OUT connector
will resume.
Arpeggiator does not start
•
Is the [ARP ON/ OFF] key turned on (lit)?
•
If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination
or song, make sure that “Arpeggiator Run” is
checked, and that an arpeggiator is selected for
This instrument does not respond to incoming MIDI
data
•
Are all MIDI cables connected correctly?
•
•
Is the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI “MIDI Clock” parameter
set to Internal?.............................................☞PG p.129
•
Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on
which it is being transmitted?................... ☞PG p.129
If the [ARP ON/ OFF] key does not respond in
GLOBAL 6.1: Arp.Pattern, you may have moved
here from Sampling mode or Media mode.
This instrument does not respond correctly to
incoming MIDI data
No sound when the [AUDIITON] key is turned on
•
The Audition function is available only in Program
mode.
•
Are the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, MIDI page MIDI Filter
settings “Enable Program Change,” “Bank,”
“Combi,” “Ctrl Change,” and “AfterT” each
checked? ...................................................... ☞PG p.130
•
If no sound is played when you turn on the
[AUDITION] key in Program mode, make sure that
the PROG 2.1: Ed-Basic, Audition page parameter
“Audition Riff” has not been turned Off.
•
•
If you wish to receive MIDI exclusive messages, is
the GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI, MIDI page MIDI Filter
“Exclusive” item checked? ........................ ☞PG p.131
............................................................................☞PG p.9
•
If no sound is played when you turn on the
[AUDITION] key in Sampling mode, check the
following points.
Does this instrument support the types of messages
that are being sent to it?
Can’t format the SD card
Is a sample correctly assigned to the currently
selected “Index”?
•
Does the media meet the requirements for use on
Are the “S (Start),” “LpS (Loop Start),” and “E
(End)” address settings correct?................☞PG p.109
•
•
If you are in the SMPL 2.1: Sample Edit, Edit2 page,
are the “S (Edit Range Start)” and “E (Edit Range
End)” settings correct?................................☞PG p.100
Can’t save/ load data on an SD card
•
•
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Is the SD card set to the “protected” setting?
Turn off the write protect switch, insert the card
back into the slot, and perform the save or load
Can’t install the driver included CD-ROM.
•
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
•
Is the CD-ROM inserted in your CD drive?
Make sure that the CD-ROM is inserted correctly.
Pressing the [SAMPLING] key does not enter Sam-
pling mode.
•
•
Could the lens of your CD drive be dirty?
Use a commercially-available lens cleaner to clean
the lens.
•
Is the EXB-SMPL installed correctly? .......☞PG p.260
Are you attempting to install from a network CD
drive?
This software cannot be installed from a network-
connected CD drive.
Cannot input sound
•
Is the EXB-SMPL installed correctly? .......☞PG p.260
•
Is your audio source connected to the AUDIO
•
•
Are you able to use USB?
If you are using Windows XP, go to [Control Panel]
→ [System], and select the [Hardware] tab. In
[Device Manager], check the settings for Universal
Serial Bus Controller and USB Root Hub.
•
•
•
If there is no sound in Sampling mode, go to SMPL
1.1: Recording, select the Input/ Pref page, and
make sure that “Lvl” and “BUS” are set correctly.
Has the TR been detected as an unknown device?
If you are using Windows XP, go to [Control Panel]
→ [System], select the [Hardware] tab, and check
[Device Manager]. If the TR has not been detected
correctly, it will be displayed in “Other devices” or
“Unknown devices.” Reconnect the USB cable; if
the TR is again displayed as an “Unknown device,”
the computer has failed to detect it correctly. Delete
the “Unknown device” entry, and reinstall the
driver. ........................................................... ☞PG p.265
•
•
If there is no sound in Program, Combination, or
Sequencer modes, go to GLOBAL 1.1: System,
select the Audio In page, and make sure that
“Input1 Level,” “Input1 BUS Select,” “Input2
Level” and “Input2 BUS Select” are set correctly.
If sound is still not input even after you have set
“Input 1 Level,” “Input 2 BUS Select,” “Input 2
Level,” and “Input 2 BUS Select” in the GLOBAL
1.1: System, Audio In page, temporarily lower the
“Input 1 Level” and “Input 2 Level,” and then
move to Program, Combination, or Sequencer
mode. Turn return to Global mode, and make the
Your software does not respond to the TR
•
•
•
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Did you install the driver?
Has your computer detected the connected TR?
If you are using Windows XP, go to Control Panel
→ “Sounds and Audio Devices Properties” and
click the Hardware tab.
Cannot record a sample
If you are using Mac OS X, go to Macintosh HD →
Application folder → Utility folder → “Audio MIDI
Settings,” select the “MIDI Devices” tab, and check
that the TR has been detected.
•
Are one or more SIMM modules installed?
........................................................................☞PG p.260
•
Is there free memory area?.........................☞PG p.120
Select a different memory bank...................☞PG p.92
Delete unneeded samples.............................☞PG p.96
Save important samples before deleting them.
Some computers may not recognize the TR
because of their hardware configuration.
..................................................................☞PG p.96, 153
•
•
Check the TR’s assignments and USB-MIDI port
settings.
The TR does not recognize when MO media has
been exchanged, and does not correctly display
the media information after the exchange.
The connected device or software may not support
the messages you are transmitting. Refer to the
owner’s manual of the connected device or
software to verify that it responds to the messages
you are transmitting.
•
If you are able to switch the mode setting of your
MO drive between DOS/ V(PC/ AT) and Mac
settings, please use DOS/ V(PC/ AT) mode. For
details on changing the mode of your drive, refer to
the owner’s manual for your MO drive.
•
•
Use the Media mode Media Information page
utility “Scan SCSI device” to remount the SCSI
device.
If your MO drive does not have a mode setting, or
if the media exchange is not recognized even after
you switch the mode, use the drive select button to
select a different drive, and then re-select the MO
drive.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and options
RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/ Recording) function
(One set is available for each one song)
Specifications
Media mode
Load, save, utility
System
HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system
Data filter function (save/ load MIDI exclusive data)
Loading from CD-ROM (ISO 9660 level1) is supported
(if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed)
Combinations, programs, drum kits, user arpeggio
patterns (.PCG) created on the TRITON/ TRITONpro/
TRITONproX or the TRITON-Rack can be convert-
loaded.
Modes
Combination, Program, Sequencer, Global, Media,
Sampling (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
Tone generator
HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system
Polyphony: 62 voices (62 oscillators) in single mode
31 voices (62 oscillators) in double mode
Songs (.SNG) created on the TRITON/ TRITONpro/
TRITONproX can be convert-loaded.
Sampling (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
48 kHz, 16 bit linear
Maximum sample data memory capacity 64 Mbyte
(with SIMM expansion)
Filters:
24 dB/ oct LPF with resonance
12 dB/ oct LPF + HPF
Alternate modulation function
Waveform memory
4000 samples, 1000 multisamples
(128 indexes for each multisample
Time Slice, Time Stretch, and various other editing
functions
Able to load AIFF, WAVE, AKAI (S1000/ 3000), Korg
format sample data can be loaded
Sample data can be exported in AIFF or WAVE formats
64 Mbyte PCM ROM
(470 multisamples, 518 drumsamples)
If the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is installed:
Sample data RAM (SIMM): 16 Mbyte included with
the EXB-SMPL (expandable up to 64 Mbyte)
Effect section
1 insert effect (stereo in/ out),
Keyboard
2 master effects (mono in/ stereo out),
1 master EQ (3-band stereo), all usable simultaneously
89 effect types (available for insert effects or master
effects)
61 key, 76 key: synth action; velocity & aftertouch
88 key: Weighted; velocity & aftertouch.
Controllers
Effect dynamic modulation function
Joystick, [SW1]/ [SW2] keys, REALTIME CONTROLS
knobs [1]–[4] and [SELECT] key, [ARP ON/ OFF] key
Combinations/ Programs
384 user memory combinations (384 preloads)
512 user memory programs (512 preloads)
128 + 9 drum ROM programs (GM sound map compat-
ible)
User interface
Graphical user interface: 240 × 64 pixel LCD display
Mode keys:
[COMBI], [PROG], [SEQ], [GLOBAL], [MEDIA],
[SAMPLING]
383 audition riffs
Drum Kits
Value controllers:
[VALUE] dial, [INC]/ [DEC] keys, numeric keys
([0]...[9], [–], [./ HOLD]
24 user drum kits (16 preloads)
9 ROM GM drum kits (GM2 sound map compatible)
Dual polyphonic arpeggiator
Cursor keys [ ], [ ](–), [ ], [ ](+),
[MENU/ PAGE +/ –] keys, [EXIT] key, [ENTER] key,
[COMPARE] key, [F1]…[F8](T1/ T9…T8/ T16) key,
[TIMBRE/ TRACK] key
Use two arpeggiators simultaneously
(Combination, Sequencer modes)
5 preset arpeggio patterns
216 user arpeggio patterns (216 preloads)
BANK keys:
Sequencer
PROG BANK: [A], [B], [C], [D], [GM]
COMBI BANK: [A], [B], [C]
16 timbres, 16 tracks + 1 master track
Maximum capacity: 200,000 notes
Resolution ꢀ / 192
SEQUENCER control keys:
[PAUSE], [REW], [FF], [LOCATE]
200 songs
SEQUENCER/ SAMPING (if the separately sold EXB-
SMPL option is installed) control keys:
[REC/ WRITE], [START/ STOP]
20 cue lists
150 preset patterns, 100 user patterns (for each song)
16 preset/ 16 user template songs
Supports TR format and SMF (formats 0 and 1)
Other:
[AUDITION] key, [CATEGORY] key
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio outputs
Included items:
1/ 4" AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/ MONO, R:
1/ 4" AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 1, 2
CD-ROM (KORG USB-MIDI driver, Voice Name List)
AC/ AC power supply 9VAC 3.0A
Output impedance
1.1 [kΩ]
(L/ MONO is 550 [Ω] for mono)
Maximum output level
L/ MONO, R:
(INDIVIDUAL)1.2:
Load impedance
+12.0 [dBu]
+11.6 [dBu]
100 [kΩ] or greater
Operating requirements for con-
nection to a computer
1/ 4" AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONE
Windows
Operating system
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional
Output impedance
Maximum output level
Load impedance
33 [Ω]
36 [mW]
33 [Ω]
Computer
Audio inputs (if the separately sold EXB-SMPL option is
installed)
A computer with USB connector that meets the above
requirements
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
LEVEL [MIC/ LINE] switch, [LEVEL] knob
Macintosh
Operating system
Mac OS X 10.2 or later
Input impedance: 10 [kΩ]
Nominal level
LINE +3 [dBu]
–30 [dBu]
MIC –18 [dBu]
–53 [dBu]
Computer
@ [INPUT] knob= min.
@ [INPUT] knob= max.
@ [INPUT] knob= min.
@ [INPUT] knob= max.
An Apple Macintosh with USB connector that meets
the requirements for the above operating system
Maximum level
LINE +13 [dBu]
–20 [dBu]
MIC –8 [dBu]
–43 [dBu]
@ [INPUT] knob = min.
@ [INPUT] knob= max.
@ [INPUT] knob= min.
@ [INPUT] knob= max.
Options
Expansion board
EXB-SMPL Sampling upgrade
Expression/ volume pedal:
XVP-10 EXP/ VOL pedal
Source impedance: 600 [Ω]
Control inputs
DAMPER (half-damper supported), ASSIGNABLE
SWITCH/ PEDAL
Foot controller:
EXP-2
Damper pedal:
DS-1H
MIDI
MIDI IN, OUT, THRU, USB B connector
Pedal switch:
PS-1
SD card slot
Usable media: 2.7–3.6 V (16 MB - 1 GB)
Other:
MIDI cable
Other
AC power inlet, switch
Support for options
EXB-SMPL (one 16Mbyte 72-pin SIMM is included)
72-pin SIMM memory slots x 2 (for sample data RAM)
* Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to
change without notice. (Aug/05)
Dimensions (W × D × H)
61-key model: 1045 × 302 × 95 (mm)
76-key model: 1257 × 302 × 95 (mm)
88-key model: 1414 × 365 × 123 (mm)
Weight
61-key model: 7.8kg
76-key model: 9.2kg
88-key model: 24.1kg
Power consumption:
13W (if the EXB-SMPL option and two 32Mbyte SIMM
are installed)
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[62 notes Music Workstation/Sampler]
Date : 2005. 08. 12
MIDI Implementation Chart
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
1 – 16
1 – 16
1 – 16
1 – 16
Memorized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Memorized
Messages
Altered
3
Mode
Note
Number:
Sequencer and Arpeggiator data
can transmit all note numbers 0–127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
9n, V=0 – 127
Velocity
9n, V=0 – 127
Polyphonic (Key)
Monophonic (Channel)
Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted *A
Aftertouch
Pitch Bend
only as sequence data
*A
*C
0, 32
1, 2
Bank Select (MSB, LSB)
Joystick (+Y, –Y)
*P
*C
4, 5, 7, 8, 10
11, 12, 13
64, 65, 66, 67
70 – 79
Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C
Expression, Effect Control 1/2 *C
Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C
Sound (Realtime Controls 1–4A: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C
Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller *C
Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFX, MFX1, MFX2) *C
Control
Change
80, 81, 82, 83
93, 91, 92, 94, 95
6, 38
Data Entry (MSB, LSB)
Data Increment, Decrement
NRPN (LSB, MSB)
*C
*C
*C, *2
*C, *3
96, 97
98, 99
100, 101
0 – 95
0 – 101
120, 121
RPN (LSB, MSB)
Realtime Controls knobs 1–4 B-assign *C
Sequencer data
(receive *C)
All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers *C
Program
Change
*P
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
Variable Range
*
E*4
System Exclusive
Song Position
Song Select
Tune
When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list *1
System
Common
0 – 127
When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue lists 0–19
*1
Clock
Command
*1
*1
System
Real Time
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
Active Sense
Reset
Aux
Messages
123 – 127
Notes
*P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, After Touch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.
*1: When GLOBAL 2.1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External or Ext-USB.
*2: LSB,MSB=02,00: Arpeggiator ON/OFF, 0A,00: Arpeggiator Gate control, 0B,00: Arpeggiator Velocity control
*3: LSB,MSB=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune
*4: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune,
and Master Coarse Tune are supported.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
: Yes
: No
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
J
MIDI Channel
K
Q
L
N
R
LCD screen messages when
installed......................................18
O
Level
on/ off
Organization
Recording (Sample)
Load
Recording (Song)
P
Pan
M
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing
W
Synchronization
Z
S
T
Tempo
Select
10’s HOLD
Category
U
Send
V
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS
This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that
are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used. If you have
purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a telephone sale, you must
verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside.
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be
dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from
the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.
KORG INC.
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
2005 KORG INC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Ingersoll Rand Grinder 7015 11V A User Manual
Insignia Portable DVD Player 10 0058 User Manual
Intel Network Card FS 979 User Manual
Jasco Mouse 98536 User Manual
JVC DVR LPT1132 001A User Manual
Jwin MP3 Player JX MP259FM User Manual
Kaidan Camera Accessories KiWi Panoramic Tripod Head User Manual
Kenmore Range 7907131 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo System HM 582MD User Manual
Klipsch Speaker System 20M0499 User Manual